JP2017213033A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To enhance further game amusement in a game machine which can cause shift to an advantageous game state in a special game state and a specific state.SOLUTION: A main CPU 301 determines either a normal BB state during ART or a special BB state during ART more advantageous than the normal BB state during ART on the basis of a bonus lottery distribution table when BB is won as a winning combination in ar ART state; it determines the special BB state more advantageous than the normal BB state during ART when BB is won as a winning combination in a first ART additional state or a second ART additional state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 54

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols drawn on the peripheral surface, and a display window for displaying a part of the symbols drawn on the peripheral surfaces of the plurality of reels, the game value such as a medal by the player A gaming machine (a so-called “pachi-slot”) in which symbols are stopped and displayed on the display window by rotating all reels based on the loading operation and starting operation on the start lever, and stopping each reel based on the stop button operation by the player. )It has been known. Such a gaming machine is a player when a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on a predetermined line (hereinafter referred to as “effective line”) among symbols displayed on the display window. A privilege (for example, a medal) is given to.

  In addition, such a gaming machine detects the operation of the start lever by the player, extracts a predetermined random number value based on the detection of the operation of the start lever, and extracts the extracted random number value for each winning combination. The winning combination is determined based on the winning combination determination table in which the lottery value is defined, and reel stop control is performed based on the determined winning combination and the stop button operation by the player. Here, depending on the determined winning combination, it may be permitted to display a plurality of symbol combinations on the active line among predetermined symbol combinations.

  At this time, when “losing” is determined as the winning combination, a combination of symbols that can receive a privilege is not displayed regardless of the operation of the stop button at any timing. In addition, if the stop button is not operated at an appropriate timing, the winning combination will not be displayed on the active line in combination with the winning combination, or if the stop button is operated at any timing, There is a winning combination in which such a combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  In other words, if the winning combination is determined as a winning combination that does not stop and display the combination of symbols related to the winning combination unless the stop button is operated at the appropriate timing, the stop operation is performed at the appropriate timing. Since it is necessary to do this, the player is required to have a certain skill regarding the operation of the stop button.

  Further, in such a gaming machine, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player, a state that is advantageous to the player compared to the normal state (hereinafter referred to as “special game”). Control to shift to "state" is performed. Here, the “special game state” is a bonus that increases the probability that a combination of symbols from which medals are paid out (hereinafter referred to as “combination of symbols related to winning a prize”) is displayed on the active line compared to the normal state. Winning a game ("RB (regular bonus)", "BB (big bonus)", "CB (challenge bonus)", "MB (middle bonus)", etc.) or operating the stop button in an appropriate sequence of operations The winning symbol combination is not displayed (or the winning symbol combination is displayed if the stop button is not operated in the proper operation order). In the case of “AT (assist time)” in which an appropriate stop button operation order is notified, the start lever is operated without performing the medal insertion operation. Re-game the player is started there is to improve the probability that is determined "RT (replay time)", AT and RT is activated at the same time "ART (assisted replay time)" or the like as a winning combination by the. Therefore, the player plays a game while desiring to shift to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

  Such a gaming machine has a special game state such as ART, a specific state (addition special zone) for extending the game period of the special game state, and a bonus game state (advantageous game state), There is a gaming machine that shifts between states (for example, Patent Document 1).

  In the specific state (additional special zone), as the number of games is extended, a predetermined point can be acquired. The gaming state can be advanced more advantageously.

JP 2014-124255 A

  By the way, in the said patent document, it is comprised so that a specific state may satisfy | fill predetermined | prescribed transition conditions in a special game state, and the period of staying in a specific state is relatively short. In such a situation, it is given to the player when it is determined to shift to the advantageous gaming state in the special gaming state and when it is determined to shift to the advantageous gaming state in the specific state. As a privilege, some differentiation was not made. In such a case, even if it is decided to shift to the advantageous gaming state, it is impossible to give the player a sense of achievement, and further improvement has been demanded in order to improve the gaming interest. .

  In view of such circumstances, an object of the present invention is to further enhance the gaming interest in a gaming machine that can shift to an advantageous gaming state in a special gaming state and a specific state.

  In order to solve such a problem, a gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols arranged on a peripheral surface, a start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player, and the start operation. A winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination based on the detection of the start operation by the detecting means, and rotating the plurality of reels based on the detection of the starting operation by the start operation detecting means. A reel rotation control means for performing control, a stop operation detection means provided for each of the plurality of reels for detecting a stop operation by a player, and the stop operation detected by the stop operation detection means. And a stop control means for stopping the reels rotated by the reel rotation control means based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means, and a normal game Special gaming state control means for controlling a special gaming state advantageous to the player over a predetermined gaming period, and a first specific state for controlling a first specific state in which a lottery is performed for extending the gaming period in the special gaming state. Specific state control means, a second specific state control means for controlling a second specific state that is a state different from the first specific state and performs a lottery related to an extension of the game period in the special gaming state, and the winning A first advantage for controlling a first advantageous game state that is different from the special game state and that is advantageous to the player as compared to the normal game state when the specific winning combination is determined by the combination determining means. When the specific winning combination is determined by the gaming state control means and the winning combination determining means, the second advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player as compared with the first advantageous gaming state is controlled. When the specific winning combination is determined by the winning combination determining means when the second advantageous gaming state control means and the special gaming state are controlled, the probability is higher than that of the second advantageous gaming state. When the specific winning combination is determined by the winning combination determining means when the first transition control means for shifting to the first advantageous gaming state and the first specific state or the second specific state are controlled Comprises a second transition control means for transitioning to the second advantageous gaming state.

  Here, the “special gaming state advantageous to the player” may be any gaming state as long as it is advantageous to the player as compared to the normal gaming state. For example, a bonus game, an AT game, an RT game, or an ART game can be applied.

  In addition, the “normal game state” may be any game state as long as the game state is disadvantageous for the player as compared to the special game state.

  The “predetermined game period” may be any game period as long as it is a predetermined game period.

  Further, the “game period” may be composed of the number of games. For example, you may comprise as a game period comprised by a "40" game. In other words, if it is “a game period in a special game state”, for example, an ART game composed of “40” games can be applied.

  Further, the “game period” may be composed of a difference number of medals. The difference in number of medals is intended to mean that the difference between the number of paid-out medals and the number of inserted medals reaches a predetermined number. For example, the difference number “100” It can be configured as a game period composed of pieces. In this case, since the game period continues until the difference number becomes “100”, for example, the length of the game period (the number of games) becomes indefinite depending on the winning status of the re-gamer (replay).

  In other words, for the “game period in the special game state”, for example, an ART game composed of a difference number of “100” (an ART game that continues until reaching the difference number of “100”) can be applied. it can.

  Further, the “first specific state” may be any state as long as it is a predetermined state.

  Further, the “second specific state” is a state different from the first specific state, and may be any state as long as it is a predetermined state.

  In addition, “extending the game period” can be applied to adding (adding) the number of games if the game period is configured by the number of games. Further, if the game period is constituted by a difference number, adding (adding) the difference number can be applied.

  Further, the “lottery related to extension” may be a lottery that directly extends the game period, or may be a lottery that indirectly extends the game period. The indirect lottery can be applied to a case in which a lottery right is once acquired and then an extended lottery is performed using the acquired lottery right.

  Further, the “specific winning combination” may be any winning combination as long as it is a predetermined winning combination. Further, the “specific winning combination” may be provided with “1” type, or may be provided with a plurality of types.

  The “first advantageous gaming state” is a gaming state that is different from the special gaming state, and any gaming state that is controlled when a specific winning combination is determined. Also good.

  The “second advantageous gaming state” is a gaming state that is different from the special gaming state, and is any gaming state that is controlled when a specific winning combination is determined. Also good.

  In addition, the “second advantageous gaming state” is more advantageous than the “first advantageous gaming state”. The “second advantageous gaming state” is more advantageous than the “first advantageous gaming state” while the advantageous gaming state is being executed. May be. For example, the game period may be extended with an advantageous probability in the “second advantageous gaming state” compared to the “first advantageous gaming state”.

  In addition, “the second advantageous gaming state” is more advantageous than the “first advantageous gaming state”. After the advantageous gaming state is ended, the “second advantageous gaming state” is more advantageous than the “first advantageous gaming state”. May be. For example, the time after the end of the “second advantageous gaming state” is to make a definite transition to the first specific state or the second specific state as compared to the time after the end of the “first advantageous gaming state”. It may be.

  According to the present invention, in the gaming machine that can shift to the advantageous gaming state in the special gaming state and the specific state, it is possible to further improve the gaming interest.

It is a figure which shows an example of the external appearance perspective view of a game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal structure of a cabinet, and the back surface of a front door. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of each name of the payout number display. It is a figure which shows an example of an arrangement | sequence data table. It is a figure which shows an example of a symbol combination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship of a winning combination, the operation order of a stop button, and winning a prize. It is a figure which shows an example of the winning combination determination table for non-RT gaming states. It is a figure which shows an example of the winning combination determination table for non-RT gaming states during BB. It is a figure which shows an example of the winning combination determination table for RB gaming state in BB. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st RT gaming state winning combination determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd RT gaming state winning combination determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd RT gaming state winning combination determination table during BB. It is a figure which shows an example of the 3RT gaming state winning combination determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the 3rd RT gaming state winning combination determination table during BB. It is a figure which shows an example of the 4RT gaming state winning combination determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the 5RT gaming state winning combination determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a game state transition diagram. It is a figure which shows the list of the states managed by the main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the transition diagram of the state managed by the main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of instruction | indication game lottery table "1" and instruction | indication game lottery table "2". It is a figure which shows an example of instruction | indication game lottery table "3". It is a figure which shows an example of instruction | indication game lottery table "4", instruction | indication game lottery table "5", instruction | indication game lottery table "6", instruction | indication game lottery table "7". It is a figure which shows an example of instruction | indication game lottery table "8", instruction | indication game lottery table "9", and instruction | indication game lottery table "10". It is a figure which shows an example of instruction | indication game lottery table "11", instruction | indication game lottery table "12", and instruction | indication game lottery table "13". It is a figure which shows an example of instruction | indication game "4" transfer lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of a bonus seed | species lottery distribution table. It is a figure which shows an example of a chance replay ceiling determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the chance replay ceiling frequency determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of an instruction | indication search table. It is a figure which shows an example of instruction | indication search table "1" and instruction | indication search table "2". It is a figure which shows an example of the instruction | indication display data table at the time of a bonus. It is a figure which shows an example of the program start process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the range lottery process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the winning combination counter lottery process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the main loop process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the game start management process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the information setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the instruction | indication game display management process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the instruction | indication game state management process "1-1" in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the inside process of a bonus in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the instruction | indication game state management process "1-2" in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the instruction | indication state flag confirmation process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the instruction | indication game state management process "1-3" in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process in instruction | indication game "1" in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process in instruction | indication game "2" in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the instruction | indication game "4" transfer lottery process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of a process in the instruction | indication game "3" in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process in instruction | indication game "4" in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of a process in instruction | indication game "5" in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the continuous effect state process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for a fall waiting state in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state transfer process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the instruction | indication game state management process "2-1" in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the instruction | indication game state management process "2-2" in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART initial setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART level lottery process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of the bonus end in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of each counter flag confirmation process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of the 3rd stop function operation "3" in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the instruction | indication game "2" completion | finish determination process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of 3rd stop instruction | indication game "4" in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of the 3rd stop instruction | indication game "5" in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the 3rd stop time continuous presentation state process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the interruption process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the LED display process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the LED data creation process for instruction information display in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the main process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the main control board communication process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the command analysis process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of BB command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of the other command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the production related process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation definition in a special BB state. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation determination table in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st animation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the 2nd animation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the 3rd animation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the 4th animation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the 5th animation in this embodiment.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Composition of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 in the present invention will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an external perspective view of the gaming machine, and FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the cabinet and the back surface of the front door.

(Game machine 1)
The gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment includes a cabinet 2 described later, a front door 3 and the like.

(Cabinet 2)
The cabinet 2 is a substantially rectangular box and has an opening on the front side. A plurality of components are attached to the cabinet 2.

(Front door 3)
The front door 3 is attached so as to close the opening on the front side of the cabinet 2. A plurality of components are attached to the front door 3.

(Hinge mechanism 4)
The hinge mechanism 4 is provided on the left side of the cabinet 2 as viewed from the front, and is provided to pivotally support the front door 3 so that it can be opened and closed.

(Keyhole 5)
The keyhole 5 is provided at the center right side of the front door 3 and is provided for unlocking the front door 3 by a locking device (not shown). Here, when a store clerk or the like of a game store performs a maintenance operation or a change of a set value indicating a degree advantageous to the player, the unlocking device (not shown) provided on the front door 3 is unlocked. Done. Specifically, the door is unlocked by inserting a door key (not shown) into the keyhole 5 and rotating it by a predetermined angle in the clockwise direction. Then, the front door 3 is opened, and maintenance work and work such as setting value change are performed. In addition, when the maintenance work and the work such as the change of the set value are finished, the front door 3 is closed and the door is locked.

(Medal slot 6)
The medal slot 6 is provided on the upper left side of the keyhole 5 when viewed from the front, and is provided for a player to insert a medal.

(BET lever 7)
The BET lever 7 is provided above the keyhole 5 and is used to play “1” medals among the stored medals when the medal insertion into the gaming machine is permitted. Is provided. The BET lever 7 is provided to allow the player to operate when a specific effect is performed when the insertion of medals into the gaming machine is not permitted. The BET lever 7 can be rotated from the position shown in FIG. 1 by about “90” degrees in side view.

(MAXBET button 8)
The MAXBET button 8 is provided at a position spaced to the left from the medal slot 6 and uses the maximum number of medals that can be used in one game ("1" game) among the stored (credit) medals for the game. Is provided to do. Here, in this embodiment, the maximum value of medals that can be used in one game is “3”. Note that the maximum value of medals that can be used in one game may be arbitrarily changed.

(Checkout button 9)
The settlement button 9 is provided on the left side of the MAXBET button 8, and is provided to settle a medal stored (credited) among medals acquired by the player. That is, when there is a medal stored (credited) and the settlement button 9 is operated, the medal is paid out to a tray unit 24 described later. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of medals that can be stored (credited) is “50”.

(Start lever 10)
The start lever 10 is provided on the lower left side of the MAXBET button 8. The start lever 10 is provided for the player to perform a start operation that triggers the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 described later. Here, based on the detection of the start operation by the player, the main control board 300 (to be described later) acquires a random number value and determines the winning combination, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right to be described later. A process for starting the rotation of the reel 20 is performed.

(Left stop button 11)
The left stop button 11 is provided on the right side of the start lever 10 in front view. The left stop button 11 is provided to detect a stop operation that triggers stopping rotation of the left reel 18 described later.

(Intermediate stop button 12)
The middle stop button 12 is provided on the right side of the left stop button 11 when viewed from the front. Further, the middle stop button 12 is provided to detect a stop operation that triggers stopping the rotation of the middle reel 19 described later.

(Right stop button 13)
The right stop button 13 is provided on the right side of the middle stop button 12 when viewed from the front. The right stop button 13 is provided to detect a stop operation that triggers stopping the rotation of the right reel 20 described later.

(Selector 14)
The selector 14 is provided on the back side of the front door 3. The selector 14 is provided to determine whether or not the material or shape of the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 is appropriate.

(Storage number indicator 15)
The stored number indicator 15 is provided above the settlement button 9. The stored number display 15 is provided to display the number of stored medal (credit) of the player stored (credited) in the gaming machine 1. Here, in the present embodiment, the stored number indicator 15 is configured by a “7-segment LED (seven segment display)”.

(Payout number display 16)
The payout number display 16 is provided below the stored number display 15. The payout number display 16 displays the number of medals to be paid out to the player, or displays that the game machine 1 is in an error state when the game machine 1 is in an error state. Is provided. Here, when a state to be managed is an “ART state” to be described later, the main control board 300 to be described later performs an RT3 replay “1”, an RT3 replay “2”, an RT3 replay “ 3 ”, RT3 replay“ 4 ”, RT3 replay“ 5 ”, RT4 replay“ 1 ”, RT4 replay“ 2 ”, RT4 replay“ 3 ”, RT4 replay“ 4 ”, RT4 replay“ 5 ” ", Push order bell" 123A ", push order bell" 132A ", push order bell" 2A ", push order bell" 312A ", push order bell" 321A ", push order bell" 123B ", push order bell" 132B " When the push order bell “2B”, the push order bell “312B”, or the push order bell “321B” is determined, the left stop button 1 is sent via the status board 100 described later. Performs processing for displaying the center stop button 12, a part or all of the operational sequence of the right stop button 13 to the payout number display unit 16. For example, when the push order bell “123A” is won, an operation order indicating that the left stop button 11 is operated first and the middle stop button 12 is operated next is displayed on the payout number display 16. Note that “1” defined in “push order bell” corresponds to the left stop button 11, “2” corresponds to the middle stop button 12, and “3” corresponds to the right stop button 13. It corresponds to. In the following description, the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 may be referred to as “operation order”. Here, in the present embodiment, the payout number display 16 is constituted by a “7-segment LED (seven segment display)”.

(Door open / close sensor 17s)
The door opening / closing sensor 17s is provided on the back side of the keyhole 5, and is provided to detect whether or not the front door 3 is open. The door opening / closing sensor 17s includes a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion. When a door key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole 5 and the door key (not shown) is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle, the door opening / closing sensor 17s is locked. The part (not shown) will rotate. And the light-receiving part cannot receive the light emitted from the light-emitting part when the locking part rotates. Thereby, the door open / close sensor 17s detects the opening of the front door 3.

(Left reel 18)
The left reel 18 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and has a cylindrical structure. Further, a translucent sheet is mounted on the peripheral surface of the cylindrical structure of the left reel 18, and a plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a row on the sheet. The left reel 18 is rotationally driven by a left stepping motor 151 described later, and a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed.

(Middle reel 19)
The middle reel 19 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and has a cylindrical structure. Further, a translucent sheet is mounted on the peripheral surface of the cylindrical structure of the middle reel 19, and a plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a row on the sheet. The middle reel 19 is driven to rotate by a middle stepping motor 152, which will be described later, and a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed.

(Right reel 20)
The right reel 20 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and has a cylindrical structure. In addition, a translucent sheet is mounted on the peripheral surface of the cylindrical structure of the right reel 20, and a plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a row on the sheet. The right reel 20 is rotationally driven by a right stepping motor 153, which will be described later, and a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed.

(Direction button 21)
The effect button 21 is provided on the right side of the MAXBET button 8 and is provided for the player to operate at a predetermined timing. Here, the sub control board 400 described later performs display control of the liquid crystal display device 31 described later via the effect control board 500 described later when the operation of the effect button 21 is detected.

(Cross key 22)
The cross key 22 is provided on the right side of the effect button 21 and includes an up button, a down button, a left button, and a right button, and is provided for the player to operate at a predetermined timing. ing. Then, the sub control board 400 described later performs display control of the liquid crystal display device 31 and the like described later via the effect control board 500 described later when the operation of the cross key 22 is detected.

(Display window 23)
The display window 23 is provided on the front side of the left reel 18, middle reel 19, and right reel 20, and a plurality of symbols drawn on the peripheral surfaces of the left reel 18, middle reel 19, and right reel 20 can be visually recognized. Is provided to do. Specifically, “3” symbols drawn on the peripheral surface of the left reel 18, “3” symbols drawn on the peripheral surface of the middle reel 19, and drawn on the peripheral surface of the right reel 20. A total of “9” symbols of “3” symbols can be viewed through the display window 23. In the present embodiment, in order to facilitate the visual recognition of the symbols displayed on the display window 23, the symbols displayed on the display window 23 are irradiated by emitting a backlight (not shown). .

(Effective line)
Here, in the present embodiment, among the symbols displayed on the display window 23, the effective line is a symbol displayed on the middle stage of the left reel 18, a symbol displayed on the middle stage of the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. The “middle line” connecting the symbols displayed in the middle stage, the symbols displayed in the upper stage of the left reel 18, the symbols displayed in the upper stage of the middle reel 19, and the symbols displayed in the upper stage of the right reel 20. The “upper line” connecting the symbols, the symbol displayed on the upper part of the left reel 18, the symbol displayed on the middle part of the middle reel 19, and the symbol displayed on the lower part of the right reel 20, ”, The symbol displayed on the lower part of the left reel 18, the symbol displayed on the middle part of the middle reel 19, and the“ upward right line ”connecting the symbols displayed on the upper part of the right reel 20 are effective lines. Become. The effective lines are not limited to these effective lines, and other lines may be effective lines. Further, any one of the above-described effective lines may be used as the effective line. In any case, as long as at least one effective line is provided, the effective line may be set in any way.

(Tray unit 24)
The saucer unit 24 is provided below the front face of the front door 3. In addition, the tray unit 24 is provided for receiving and storing medals discharged from a medal payout opening 25 described later.

(Medal payout exit 25)
The medal payout opening 25 is provided below the front door 3 and is provided for discharging a medal paid out by a hopper 202 described later when the medal payout is performed. The medal payout opening 25 is inserted when the medal inserted into the medal slot 6 is not an appropriate medal by the selector sensor 14s or when the medal insertion cannot be accepted. It is provided for discharging the medal inserted into the medal slot 6 when a medal is inserted into the slot 6.

(Liquid crystal display device 31)
The liquid crystal display device 31 is provided above the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20, and is provided for displaying moving images, still images, and the like. Here, the sub-control board 400 to be described later has states managed by the main control board 300 to be described later in “ART state”, “first carryover state during ART”, “second carryover state during ART”, “second In the case of any one of “1 ART added state”, “2nd ART added state”, “infinite ART state”, “ART continuous effect state”, and “ART ready state”, the push bell “123A” is pressed by an internal lottery process described later. , Push order bell “132A”, push order bell “2A”, push order bell “312A”, push order bell “321A”, push order bell “123B”, push order bell “132B”, push order bell “2B”, When one of the push order bell “312B” and the push order bell “321B” is determined, the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button are provided via an effect control board 500 described later. 3 sequence of operations performs a process of displaying on the liquid crystal display device 31. For example, when the push order bell “123A” is won, the operation order indicating that the left stop button 11 is operated first, the middle stop button 12 is operated next, and the right stop button 13 is operated last. It is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31.

  In the case of any of the “normal BB state”, “special BB state”, “normal BB state during ART”, and “special BB state during ART”, the push order bell “123A”, Push order bell “132A”, push order bell “2A”, push order bell “312A”, push order bell “321A”, push order bell “123B”, push order bell “132B”, push order bell “2B”, push Similarly, when either the order bell “312B” or the push order bell “321B” is determined, the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are connected via an effect control board 500 described later. The operation order is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31. However, when the RB in the BB state is not won, the push order bell “123A”, the push order bell “132A”, the push order bell “2A”, the push order bell “312A”, the push order are performed by an internal lottery process described later. When any one of the bell “321A”, the push order bell “123B”, the push order bell “132B”, the push order bell “2B”, the push order bell “312B”, and the push order bell “321B” is determined. The operation sequence of the stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31, and the left stop button 11 and the middle stop are displayed in the state where the RB in the BB state is selected (during carryover). The operation order of the button 12 and the right stop button 13 is configured to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31. Details of this point will be described later.

  In addition, the replay during RT3 “1”, the replay during RT3 “2”, the replay during RT3 “3”, the replay during RT3 “4”, the replay during RT3 “5”, the replay during RT4 “1” by the internal lottery process described later. Even when any one of the replay during RT4 “2”, the replay during RT4 “3”, the replay during RT4 “4”, and the replay during RT4 “5” is determined, depending on the state managed by the main control board 300, the left The operation order of the stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31. For example, when a state managed by a main control board 300 described later is an “ART state” described later, a replay during RT3 “1”, a replay during RT3 “2”, a replay during RT3 “3”, and a replay during RT3 “ 4 "and RT3 replay" 5 "are determined, left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, right stop button 13 so that" combination of symbols related to normal replay "is displayed. Are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31.

(LED32)
The LED 32 is provided on the peripheral edge of the front surface of the front door 3 and is designed and designed with a shape, color, pattern, pattern, etc. appealing to the player's vision. Here, the below-described sub control board 400 performs an effect of visually appealing to the player by performing a process of turning on and blinking the LED 32.

(Speaker 33)
The speaker 33 is provided below the back side of the front door 3 and is provided for outputting BGM, sound, sound effects, etc. when performing an effect. Here, the below-described sub control board 400 performs a process of outputting sound from the speaker 33, thereby performing an effect appealing to the player.

(Status board 100)
The status board 100 is provided on the back side of the front door 3 and below the display window 23. The status board 100 includes a lever switch 7sw described later, a MAXBET switch 8sw described later, a settlement switch 9sw described later, a start switch 10sw described later, a left stop switch 11sw described later, a middle stop switch 12sw described later, and a right stop described later. A switch 13sw, a selector sensor 14s described later, a stored number display 15, a payout number display 16, a door open / close sensor 17s, and a main control board 300 described later are connected.

(Reel control board 150)
The reel control board 150 is provided above the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 (not shown in FIG. 2), and the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotated and stopped. Is provided to control The reel control board 150 includes a left stepping motor 151 to be described later, a middle stepping motor 152 to be described later, a right stepping motor 153 to be described later, a left reel sensor 154s to be described later, a middle reel sensor 155s to be described later, and a right reel sensor 156s to be described later. And a main control board 300 to be described later are connected.

(Power supply board 200)
The power supply board 200 is provided inside the cabinet 2 on the left side when viewed from the front, and is provided for performing control for supplying power to the gaming machine 1. The power supply board 200 is connected to a power switch 201sw described later, a hopper 202 described later, a main control board 300, and a sub control board 400 described later.

(Power button 201)
The power button 201 is provided on the left side of a front view of a hopper 202 described later, and is provided for performing an operation of supplying power to the gaming machine 1.

(Hopper 202)
The hopper 202 is provided on the right side of the power supply board 200 as viewed from the front, and is provided for paying out medals to the player. Here, the main control board 300, which will be described later, performs a process of driving the hopper 202 via the power supply board 200 when a combination of symbols for paying out medals is displayed on the active line, and gives a medal to the player. Process to pay out.

(Main control board 300)
The main control board 300 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and above the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20, and is provided for controlling the gaming machine 1. The main control board 300 includes a main CPU 301 described later, a main ROM 302 described later, a main RAM 303 described later, and a main random number generator 304 described later. Further, the external control terminal board 30, the status board 100, the reel control board 150, the power supply board 200, and the sub control board 400, which will be described later, are connected to the main control board 300.

(Sub control board 400)
The sub control board 400 is provided below the main control board 300, and is provided mainly for controlling the production. The sub control board 400 includes a sub CPU 401 described later, a sub ROM 402 described later, a sub RAM 403 described later, and a sub random number generator 404 described later. Furthermore, a later-described effect button sensor 21s, a later-described cross key sensor 22s, a power supply board 200, a main control board 300, and a later-described effect control board 500 are connected to the sub-control board 400. The sub control board 400 is connected so that information (commands, etc.) is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 400 only in one direction.

(Production control board 500)
The effect control board 500 is provided above the back surface of the front door 3 and is provided mainly for executing an effect. The effect control board 500 includes an effect control CPU 501 described later, an effect control ROM 502 described later, an effect control RAM 503 described later, a CGROM 504 described later, a sound source IC 505 described later, a sound source ROM 506 described later, and a VDP 507 described later. Further, the liquid crystal display device 31, the LED 32, the speaker 33, and the sub control board 400 are connected to the effect control board 500.

(Block diagram of the entire gaming machine)
Next, a block diagram of the entire gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the gaming machine 1, a status board 100, a reel control board 150, a power supply board 200, and a sub control board 400 are connected to a main control board 300 that controls main operations of the gaming machine 1.

(Lever switch 7sw)
The lever switch 7sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the BET lever 7. Here, the status board 100 transmits a lever switch input signal to the main control board 300 when the operation of the BET lever 7 is detected by the lever switch 7sw. The main control board 300 receives “1” from the stored (credit) medal based on the receipt of the lever switch input signal from the status board 100 when the medal insertion into the gaming machine is permitted. The process of using “medals” is performed.

(MAXBET switch 8sw)
The MAXBET switch 8sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the MAXBET button 8. Here, the status board 100 transmits a MAXBET switch input signal to the main control board 300 when the operation of the MAXBET button 8 is detected by the MAXBET switch 8sw. Then, based on the reception of the MAXBET switch input signal from the status board 100, the main control board 300 performs a process of using “3” medals from the stored medals.

(Settlement switch 9sw)
The settlement switch 9sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the settlement button 9. Here, the status board 100 transmits a settlement switch input signal to the main control board 300 when an operation of the settlement button 9 is detected by the settlement switch 9sw. Then, the main control board 300 performs a process of adjusting the stored medals based on the reception of the adjustment switch input signal from the status board 100.

(Start switch 10sw)
The start switch 10sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the start lever 10. Here, the status board 100 transmits a start switch input signal to the main control board 300 when an operation of the start lever 10 is detected by the start switch 10sw. The main control board 300 performs processing for starting rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 based on the reception of the start switch input signal from the status board 100.

(Left stop switch 11sw)
The left stop switch 11sw is a switch for detecting an operation of the left stop button 11. Here, the status board 100 transmits a left stop switch input signal to the main control board 300 when an operation of the left stop button 11 is detected by the left stop switch 11sw. The main control board 300 performs a process of stopping the rotating left reel 18 based on the reception of the left stop switch input signal from the status board 100.

(Intermediate stop switch 12sw)
The middle stop switch 12sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the middle stop button 12. Here, the status board 100 transmits an intermediate stop switch input signal to the main control board 300 when the operation of the intermediate stop button 12 is detected by the intermediate stop switch 12sw. The main control board 300 performs a process of stopping the rotating middle reel 19 based on the reception of the middle stop switch input signal from the status board 100.

(Right stop switch 13sw)
The right stop switch 13sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the right stop button 13. Here, the status board 100 transmits a right stop switch input signal to the main control board 300 when the operation of the right stop button 13 is detected by the right stop switch 13sw. Then, the main control board 300 performs processing for stopping the rotating right reel 20 based on the reception of the right stop switch input signal from the status board 100.

(Selector sensor 14s)
The selector sensor 14 s is a sensor for detecting that an appropriate medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 6. Here, the status board 100 transmits a selector sensor input signal to the main control board 300 when an appropriate medal passage is detected by the selector sensor 14s. Then, the main control board 300 receives the selector sensor input signal from the status board 100, and adds “1” to the number of medals to be stored (credited) or the number of medals used in the game. A process of adding “1” is performed.

(Left stepping motor 151)
The left stepping motor 151 is provided inside the left reel 18 and is provided for controlling the left reel 18. The left stepping motor 151 has a configuration capable of stopping the rotation shaft at a specified angle. As a result, the left reel 18 rotates at a constant angle each time a pulse signal is output to the left stepping motor 151. The main control board 300 manages the rotation angle of the left reel 18 by counting the number of times a pulse signal is output to the left stepping motor 151 after a reel index is detected by a left reel sensor 154s described later. .

(Medium stepping motor 152)
The middle stepping motor 152 is provided inside the middle reel 19 and is provided for controlling the middle reel 19. Further, the middle stepping motor 152 has a configuration capable of stopping the rotation axis at a specified angle. As a result, the intermediate reel 19 rotates at a constant angle each time a pulse signal is output to the intermediate stepping motor 152. The main control board 300 manages the rotation angle of the middle reel 19 by counting the number of times a pulse signal is output to the middle stepping motor 152 after the reel index is detected by the middle reel sensor 155s described later. .

(Right stepping motor 153)
The right stepping motor 153 is provided inside the right reel 20 and is provided for controlling the right reel 20. The right stepping motor 153 has a configuration capable of stopping the rotation shaft at a specified angle. As a result, the right reel 20 rotates at a constant angle each time a pulse signal is output to the right stepping motor 153. The main control board 300 manages the rotation angle of the right reel 20 by counting the number of times a pulse signal is output to the right stepping motor 153 after a reel index is detected by a right reel sensor 156s described later. .

(Left reel sensor 154s)
The left reel sensor 154s is provided inside the left reel 18, and includes an optical sensor having a light emitting part and a light receiving part. The left reel sensor 154s is provided to detect a reel index indicating that the left reel 18 has rotated “1”.

(Medium reel sensor 155s)
The middle reel sensor 155s is provided inside the middle reel 19, and includes an optical sensor having a light emitting part and a light receiving part. The middle reel sensor 155s is provided to detect a reel index indicating that the middle reel 19 has rotated “1”.

(Right reel sensor 156s)
The right reel sensor 156s is provided inside the right reel 20, and includes an optical sensor having a light emitting part and a light receiving part. The right reel sensor 156s is provided to detect a reel index indicating that the right reel 20 has rotated “1”.

(Power switch 201sw)
The power switch 201sw is a switch for detecting an operation of the power button 201. Here, the power supply board 200 performs a process of supplying power to the gaming machine 1 when the operation of the power button 201 is detected by the power switch 201sw.

(Hopper sensor 202s)
The hopper sensor 202s is a sensor for detecting that a medal to be paid out by driving the hopper 202 has passed. Here, the power supply board 200 transmits a hopper sensor input signal to the main control board 300 when the hopper sensor 202s detects the payout of medals. Then, the main control board 300 performs a process of subtracting the payout number based on the reception of the hopper sensor input signal from the status board 100.

(External concentration terminal board 30)
The external concentrated terminal board 30 is managed by the main control board 300, a medal insertion signal that can specify the number of medals used in the game, a medal payout signal that can specify the number of medals paid out to the player, Is an ART signal that can specify that the state has shifted to an ART state, which will be described later, or an “infinite ART state”, and a state managed by the main control board 300 is a “first ART added state”, “ An added state signal that can specify that the state has shifted to any of the added states of the “second ART added state”, “normal BB state”, “special BB state”, “normal BB state during ART”, and “special BB state during ART” A hall computer (illustrated) shows a BB state signal that can specify that the state has shifted to "BB state", and a security signal that can specify that an illegal act has been performed. It is provided for transmitting to the external of the gaming machine 1 of not), or the like.

(Main CPU 301)
The main CPU 301 is provided on the main control board 300. Further, the main CPU 301 reads a program stored in a main ROM 302, which will be described later, and performs a predetermined arithmetic process in accordance with the progress of the game, so that the status board 100, the reel control board 150, the power board 200, and the sub control board. A predetermined signal is transmitted to 400. The main CPU 301 has a built-in register.

(Main ROM 302)
The main ROM 302 is provided on the main control board 300. The main ROM 302 is provided for storing a control program executed by the main CPU 301, a data table, data for transmitting a command to the sub control board 400, and the like. Specifically, the main ROM 302 includes an array data table (see FIG. 5) to be described later, a symbol combination table (see FIG. 6) to be described later, a winning combination determination table for a non-RT gaming state (see FIG. 8) to be described later, BB non-RT gaming state winning combination determination table (see FIG. 9), BB middle RB gaming state winning combination determination table (see FIG. 10) described later, and first RT gaming state winning combination determination table described later (see FIG. 11). ), A second RT gaming state winning combination determination table described later (see FIG. 12), a BB second RT gaming state winning combination determination table described later (see FIG. 13), and a third RT gaming state winning combination determination table described later (see FIG. 13). 14), a third RT gaming state winning combination determination table (see FIG. 15), which will be described later, a fourth RT gaming state winning combination determination table (see FIG. 16), which will be described later, and a fifth RT game, which will be described later. The winning winning combination determination table (see FIG. 17), instruction game lottery tables “1” and “2” (see FIG. 21) described later, instruction game lottery table “3” (see FIG. 22) described later, and instruction game described later Lottery tables “4”, “5”, “6”, “7” (see FIG. 23), instruction game lottery tables “8”, “9”, “10” (see FIG. 24) to be described later, instruction games to be described later Lottery tables “11”, “12”, “13” (see FIG. 25), an instruction game “4” shift lottery table (see FIG. 26) described later, a bonus type lottery distribution table (see FIG. 27) described later, Chance replay ceiling determination table (see FIG. 28), chance replay ceiling frequency determination table (see FIG. 29) described later, instruction search table (see FIG. 30) described later, instruction search table “1” described later, instruction search table “2” (Fig. 31 Irradiation), and stores the later bonus during instruction display data table (see FIG. 32) or the like.

(Main RAM 303)
The main RAM 303 is provided on the main control board 300. The main RAM 303 is provided for storing various data determined by the execution of the program by the main CPU 301. Specifically, the main RAM 303 is provided with various counters such as a later-described input number counter and various storage areas such as a setting value storage area described later.

(Main random number generator 304)
The main random number generator 304 is provided on the main control board 300. The main random number generator 304 is provided for generating a random value used in a lottery or the like for determining a winning combination. Here, in the present embodiment, the main random number generator 304 generates a random number value in the range of “0” to “65535”.

(Production button sensor 21s)
The effect button sensor 21 s is connected to the effect button 21 and is provided to detect an operation of the effect button 21. Here, the effect button sensor 21 s transmits an effect button sensor input signal to the sub control board 400 based on the detection of the operation of the effect button 21. Then, the sub control board 400 performs processing when the effect button 21 is operated based on the reception of the effect button sensor input signal.

(Cross key sensor 22s)
The cross key sensor 22 s is connected to the cross key 22 and is provided to detect an operation of the cross key 22. Here, the cross key sensor 22 s transmits a cross key sensor input signal to the sub-control board 400 based on detecting the operation of the cross key 22. Then, the sub-control board 400 performs processing when the cross key 22 is operated based on the reception of the cross key sensor input signal.

(Sub CPU 401)
The sub CPU 401 is provided on the sub control board 400. Further, the sub CPU 401 reads a program stored in a sub ROM 402 described later, and performs predetermined processing based on command information received from the main control board 300 and signals input from the effect button sensor 21s and the cross key sensor 22s. It is provided for performing calculations and supplying the results of the calculations to the effect control board 500 and the like.

(Sub ROM 402)
The sub ROM 402 is provided on the sub control board 400. The sub ROM 402 is provided for storing a control program executed by the sub CPU 401, a data table, and the like. Specifically, the sub ROM 402 stores an effect determination table (see FIG. 76) described later.

(Sub RAM 403)
The sub RAM 403 is provided on the sub control board 400. The sub RAM 403 is provided for storing various data determined by the execution of the program by the sub CPU 401.

(Sub-random number generator 404)
The sub random number generator 404 is provided on the sub control board 400. The sub-random number generator 404 is provided for generating a random value used in a lottery or the like for determining the production. Here, in the present embodiment, the sub-random number generator 404 generates a random value in the range of “0” to “65535”.

(Production control CPU 501)
The effect control CPU 501 is provided on the effect control board 500. The effect control CPU 501 is provided to read a program stored in an effect control ROM 502 described later and create a display list based on a signal received from the sub control board 400. The effect control CPU 501 performs control for causing the liquid crystal display device 31 to display image data stored in a CGROM 504 described later.

(Production control ROM 502)
The effect control ROM 502 is provided on the effect control board 500. The effect control ROM 502 is provided for storing a control program executed by the effect control CPU 501, a data table, and the like. Specifically, the effect control ROM 502 is a program for control processing of the effect control CPU 501, a display list generation program for generating a display list, a combination of animation scenes that are referred to when displaying animations, and a display order of animation scenes. A weight frame indicating an image display time, various target data such as a sprite identification number and a transfer source address, various parameters such as a sprite display position and a transfer destination address, a drawing method, and the like are stored.

(Production control RAM 503)
The effect control RAM 503 is provided on the effect control board 500. The effect control RAM 503 functions as a data work area during the calculation process of the effect control CPU 501, and is provided for temporarily storing data read from the effect control ROM 502.

(CGROM504)
The CGROM 504 is provided on the effect control board 500. The CGROM 504 includes color number information that specifies a color number for each pixel in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, “32” pixels × “32” pixels), and an α value that indicates the transparency of the image. It is provided for compressing and storing image data comprising a set.

(Sound source IC505)
The sound source IC 505 is provided on the effect control board 500. The sound source IC 505 is provided for reading a program and data relating to sound stored in a sound source ROM 506, which will be described later, and generating a sound signal for driving the speaker 33.

(Sound source ROM 506)
The sound source ROM 506 is provided on the effect control board 500. Further, the sound source ROM 506 is provided for storing a program, data, and the like related to a sound output when an effect is executed.

(VDP507)
The VDP 507 is a so-called image processor, and controls to read image data from the “display frame buffer area” out of the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area based on an instruction from the effect control CPU 501. Then, control for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 31 is performed by generating a video signal (for example, LVDS signal or RGB signal) based on the read image data. The VDP 507 includes a control register (not shown), a CG bus interface, a CPU interface, a clock generation circuit, an expansion circuit, a drawing circuit, a display circuit, a memory controller, and the like, which are connected by a bus.

(Each name of the payout number display)
Next, each name of the payout number display 16 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The payout number display 16 includes a first segment 16a, a second segment 16b, a third segment 16c, a fourth segment 16d, a fifth segment 16e, a sixth segment 16f, a seventh segment 16g, 8 segment 16h, 9th segment 16i, 10th segment 16j, 11th segment 16k, 12th segment 16l, 13th segment 16m, 14th segment 16n, 15th segment 16o, 16th segment 16p.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the main control board 300 performs control to display a decimal value on the payout number display 16. Thereby, the payout number display 16 can display values from “0” to “99”. For example, when “1” is displayed on the payout number display 16, the main control board 300 performs control to turn on the tenth segment 16j and the eleventh segment 16k.

  Further, the main control board 300 may perform control for displaying a binary value on the payout number display 16. Here, when a binary value is displayed on the payout number display 16, the first segment 16a corresponds to the "0th bit", the second segment 16b corresponds to the "first bit", and the third segment The segment 16c corresponds to the “second bit”, the fourth segment 16d corresponds to the “third bit”, the fifth segment 16e corresponds to the “fourth bit”, and the sixth segment 16f corresponds to the “fifth bit”. The seventh segment 16g corresponds to the “sixth bit”, the eighth segment 16h corresponds to the “seventh bit”, the ninth segment 16i corresponds to the “eighth bit”, and the tenth segment 16j Corresponds to “9th bit”, 11th segment 16k corresponds to “10th bit”, 12th segment 16l corresponds to “11th bit”, 13th segment 16m corresponds to “12th bit” The 14th segment 16n corresponds to the “13th bit”, and the 15th segment 16o corresponds to the “14th bit”. It corresponds to "16-segment 16p corresponds to the" 15th bit ". As a result, values from “0” to “65535” can be displayed. For example, when “1” is displayed on the payout number display 16, the main control board 300 performs control to turn on the first segment 16 a of the payout number display 16.

  The main control board 300 may perform control to display a hexadecimal value on the payout number display 16. Thereby, the values “0” to “FF (255)” can be displayed. Here, when displaying a hexadecimal value on the payout number display 16, when displaying “8” on the payout number display 16, the main control board 300 displays the ninth segment 10 i, the tenth segment 16 j, and so on. The 11th segment 16k, the 12th segment 16l, the 13th segment 16m, the 14th segment 16n, and the 15th segment 16o are controlled to be turned on. When displaying “B” on the payout number display 16, the main control board 300 displays the ninth segment 16i, the tenth segment 16j, the eleventh segment 16k, the twelfth segment 16l, and the thirteenth segment 16m. Then, control is performed to turn on the 14th segment 16n, the 15th segment 16o, and the 16th segment 16p. That is, by distinguishing and displaying “8” and “B” depending on whether or not the 16th segment 16p is turned on, “8” is displayed on the payout number display 16 and the payout number display 16 is displayed. The player is not confused with the display of “B”.

  When displaying a hexadecimal value on the payout number display 16, when displaying “0” on the payout number display 16, the main control board 300 includes the ninth segment 10 i, the tenth segment 16 j, Control is performed to turn on the 11th segment 16k, the 12th segment 16l, the 13th segment 16m, and the 14th segment 16n. When displaying “D” on the payout number display 16, the main control board 300 displays the ninth segment 16i, the tenth segment 16j, the eleventh segment 16k, the twelfth segment 16l, and the thirteenth segment 16m. And the control which lights the 14th segment 16n and the 16th segment 16p is performed. That is, by distinguishing “0” and “D” depending on whether or not the 16th segment 16p is turned on, “0” is displayed on the payout number display 16 and “D” is displayed on the payout number display 16. The player is not confused with the display of.

(Array data table)
Next, the array data table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The arrangement data table is provided in the main ROM 302, and the symbol position of the symbol displayed in the middle of the display window 23 when the left reel sensor 154s, the middle reel sensor 155s, and the right reel sensor 156s detect the reel index. Is defined as “00”. Also, symbol positions “00” to “20” are defined based on the symbol position “00”.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the array data table includes “a symbol related to black seven”, “a symbol related to red BAR”, “a symbol related to blue BAR”, “a symbol related to yellow BAR”, and “Blank design”, “Cherry design”, “Watermelon design”, “Bell design”, “Replay design”, and “Tag design” Has been.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to draw from the symbol position at the timing when the left stop switch 11sw, the middle stop switch 12sw, and the right stop switch 13sw detect the stop operation by the player to the symbol ahead of “4” frames. For example, when the symbol position “11” of the left reel 18 passes the middle line and the left stop switch 11sw detects a stop operation by the player, the symbol position “07” ahead of “4” frames. Symbols (designs of symbol positions “11”, “10”, “09”, “08”, and “07”) arranged up to “the symbol related to the bell” can be drawn into the middle line.

(Design combination table)
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIG. The combination of symbols defined in the symbol combination table constitutes a predetermined symbol combination of the present invention.

  The symbol combination table is stored in the main ROM 302, and defines the symbol bit name, symbol combination name, symbol combination, and the number of medals to be paid out to the player.

  Here, when the symbol combination displayed along the active line matches the symbol combination specified in the symbol combination table, the medal payout, the replay (replay) operation, the bonus operation, Control for giving a privilege such as transition of the gaming state is performed. If the symbol combination displayed along the active line does not match the symbol combination defined in the symbol combination table, the result is “out of line”.

  The symbol combination table includes a red BAR with a symbol bit name “BB01”, a blue BAR with a symbol bit name “BB02”, a yellow BAR with a symbol bit name “BB03”, and a JAC with a symbol bit name “RB”. The normal replay of the symbol bit name “REP01”, the chance replay of the symbol bit name “REP02”, the RT1 transition replay of the symbol bit name “REP03”, the RT3 transition replay “1” of the symbol bit name “REP04”, RT3 transition replay “2” with symbol bit name “REP05”, RT4 transition replay with symbol bit name “REP06”, bell with symbol bit name “NML01”, cherry “1” with symbol bit name “NML02”, Cherry spillage of symbol bit name “NML03” and symbol bit name “NML04” Watermelon “1”, watermelon “2” with symbol bit name “NML05”, cherry “2” with symbol bit name “NML06”, cherry “3” with symbol bit name “NML07”, symbol bit name “NML08” "4" is defined.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when “a combination of symbols related to the type 1 BB” is displayed on the active line, the operation of the BB (the accessory continuous operation device related to the first type special accessory) is performed. ("BB01" to "BB03"). In the present embodiment, “the combination of symbols related to one type BB” may be referred to as “the combination of symbols related to BB” and “the combination of symbols related to bonus”. In addition, “BB01” to “BB03” may be collectively referred to simply as “BB” or “bonus”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the “combination of symbols related to normal replay”, “combination of symbols related to chance replay”, “combination of symbols related to RT1 transition replay”, and “combination of symbols related to RT3 transition replay“ 1 ”. When “combination”, “combination of symbols related to RT3 transition replay“ 2 ””, and “combination of symbols related to RT4 transition replay” are displayed on the active line, re-game is performed. When the re-game operation is performed, a game in the next game can be performed without inserting medals. In the present embodiment, the “combination of symbols related to normal replay”, “combination of symbols related to chance replay”, “combination of symbols related to RT1 transition replay”, and “combination of symbols related to RT3 transition replay“ 1 ”. ”,“ Combination of symbols related to RT3 transition replay “2” ”, and“ combination of symbols related to RT4 transition replay ”are collectively referred to as“ combination of symbols related to replay ”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, “a combination of symbols relating to bell”, “a combination of symbols relating to cherry“ 1 ””, “a combination of symbols relating to cherry spill”, “a combination of symbols relating to watermelon“ 1 ”” , “Combination of symbols related to watermelon“ 2 ””, “Combination of symbols related to cherry“ 2 ””, “Combination of symbols related to cherry“ 3 ””, “Combination of symbols related to cherry“ 4 ”” are effective When displayed on the line, medals are paid out. These symbol combinations are collectively referred to as “a symbol combination related to winning a prize”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, “a combination of symbols related to cherry“ 1 ””, “a combination of symbols related to cherry spill”, “a combination of symbols related to cherry“ 2 ””, and “cherry“ 3 ” The “combination of symbols related to cherry” and the “combination of symbols related to cherry“ 4 ”” are collectively referred to as “the combination of symbols related to cherry”.

  In the present embodiment, “the combination of symbols related to watermelon“ 1 ”” and “the combination of symbols related to watermelon“ 2 ”” are collectively referred to as “the combination of symbols related to watermelon”.

(Relationship between winning role, stop button operation order, winnings, etc.)
Next, based on FIG. 7, the relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop button, and winnings will be described.

  In FIG. 7, a winning number corresponding to the winning combination, a winning combination, a condition device corresponding to the winning combination, whether or not each game state can be determined as a winning combination, a left stop button 11, a middle stop button 12, The relationship with the combination of the symbols which can be displayed on an active line by the operation order of the right stop button 13 is shown.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the condition device to be operated varies depending on the determined winning combination. For example, when the replay “1” during RT3 with the winning number “05” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the conditional devices that are activated are “REP01” and “REP06”. That is, when the replay “1” during RT3 with the winning number “05” is determined as the winning combination, “combination of symbols related to normal replay” and “combination of symbols related to RT4 replay” are displayed on the active line. Is acceptable.

  In this embodiment, even if the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated at the same symbol position, the player operates the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. Depending on the order, winning combinations with different combinations of symbols on the active line are provided. For example, when the push order bell “123A” of the winning number “20” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, the condition devices that are activated are “NML01” and “NML02”. In this case, when the left stop button 11 is operated first, the middle stop button 12 is operated next, and the right stop button 13 is operated last, the “bell” stops at the middle stage of the middle reel 19, The “combination of symbols related to the bell” is displayed on the three effective lines of the middle line, the right-down line, and the right-up line, which are effective lines. Since the payout of three medals is defined by displaying “combination of symbols related to bell” on one active line, “combination of symbols related to bell” is displayed on three active lines. As a result, nine medals are paid out. On the other hand, when the operation is performed in the other operation order, the “bell” does not stop at the middle stage of the middle reel 19. For example, the “bell” stops at the upper stage of the middle reel 19, and only the upper stage line that is an effective line is stopped. “Combination of symbols related to the bell” is displayed. In this case, even if the “combination of symbols related to the bell” is displayed, it is not possible to receive 3 medals. In “BB”, an exception may occur depending on whether the RB is being carried over. Details of this point will be described later.

  In addition, a winning combination is provided in which the combination of symbols arranged on the effective line does not differ regardless of the order of operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. For example, when “BB01 + watermelon” with a winning number “32” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process to be described later, the condition devices that will operate are “BB01”, “NML04”, and “NML05”. . In this case, when the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in any order, the timing at which “the combination of symbols related to BB01” can be displayed on the active line. When the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated, “the combination of symbols related to BB01” is displayed on the active line. However, if the operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is not detected at a timing at which “the combination of symbols related to BB01” can be displayed on the effective line, “the symbol related to BB01” Cannot be displayed on the active line. However, once “BB01” is won, it can be carried over until “a combination of symbols related to BB01” is displayed on the active line. For example, even if the game winning “BB01” fails to display “the combination of symbols related to BB01” on the active line, “the combination of symbols related to BB01” is effective after the next game. It can be displayed on the line. Similarly, “BB02”, “BB03”, and “RB” are winning combinations that can be carried over.

  In addition, when the “watermelon” with the winning number “16” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the condition devices that are activated are “NML04” and “NML05”. In this case, if the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated at a timing at which “a combination of symbols related to watermelon” can be displayed on the effective line, “a combination of symbols related to watermelon” "Can be displayed on the active line.

  In addition, when the “cherry” of the winning number “17” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the conditional devices that are activated are “NML02”, “NML03”, “NML05”, “NML06”. ”,“ NML07 ”, and“ NML08 ”. In this case, if the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated at a timing at which “cherry” can be displayed on the active line, “the combination of symbols related to cherry” is displayed on the active line. Can be displayed.

(Non-RT gaming state winning combination determination table)
Next, the winning combination determination table for non-RT gaming state will be described with reference to FIG.

  The non-RT gaming state winning combination determination table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when determining a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the “non-RT gaming state” described later. In the non-RT gaming state winning combination determination table, a winning number, a winning combination, and a lottery value for each set value are defined. Here, in this embodiment, the winning combination determination table for the non-RT gaming state exemplifies the lottery value when the setting value is “1” and the lottery value when the setting value is “6”. A drawing of a lottery value when the value is “2”, a lottery value when the setting value is “3”, a lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and a lottery value when the setting value is “5” Omitted.

  In addition, the winning combination determination table for the non-RT gaming state includes the normal replay with the winning number “01”, the chance replay with the winning number “02”, the premium replay with the winning number “03”, and the watermelon with the winning number “16”. And a cherry with a winning number “17”, a chance item “1” with a winning number “18”, a chance item “2” with a winning number “19”, and a push order bell “123A” with a winning number “20”. , Push order number "21A" push order bell "132A", win number "22" push order bell "2A", win number "23" push order bell "312A" and win number "24" push The order bell “321A”, the order number “123B” of the winning number “25”, the order number “132B” of the winning number “26”, the order number “2B” of the winning number “27”, and the winner Pushing number bell “3” “3” 2B ”, the push order bell“ 321B ”of the winning number“ 29 ”, the BB01 + chance replay of the winning number“ 30 ”, the BB01 + middle cherry of the winning number“ 31 ”, the BB01 + watermelon of the winning number“ 32 ”, Winning number “33” BB01 + Cherry, winning number “34” BB01 + chance “1”, winning number “35” BB01 + chance “2”, winning number “36” BB02 + chance replay, winning BB02 + middle cherry with number "37", BB02 + watermelon with winning number "38", BB02 + cherry with winning number "39", BB02 + chance number "1" with winning number "40", and winning number "41" BB02 + chance number "2", winning number "42" BB03 + chance replay, winning number "43" BB03 + medium Cherry, BB03 + watermelon with winning number “44”, BB03 + cherry with winning number “45”, BB03 + chance number “1” with winning number “46”, BB03 + chance number “2” with winning number “47” A lottery value is defined.

  That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and in the case of performing the lottery using the winning combination determination table for the non-RT gaming state, the RT2 replay of the winning number “04” and the winning number “05” RT3 replay “1”, winning number “06” RT3 replay “2”, winning number “07” RT3 replay “3”, winning number “08” RT3 replay “4”, During RT3 replay “5” with winning number “09”, during RT4 replay “1” with winning number “10”, during RT4 replay “2” with winning number “11”, and during RT4 with winning number “12” Replay “3”, winning number “13” RT4 replay “4”, winning number “14” RT4 replay “5”, winning number “15” middle cherry, and winning number “48” RB decided as winning Rukoto is not.

(Winning role determination table for non-RT gaming state during BB)
Next, based on FIG. 9, the winning combination determination table for the non-RT gaming state during BB will be described.

  The BB non-RT gaming state winning combination determination table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when determining the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the “BB non-RT gaming state” described later. In the BB non-RT gaming state winning combination determination table, a winning number, a winning combination, and a lottery value for each set value are defined. Here, in this embodiment, the winning combination determination table for the non-RT gaming state during BB illustrates the lottery value when the setting value is “1” and the lottery value when the setting value is “6”. The lottery value when the set value is “2”, the lottery value when the set value is “3”, the lottery value when the set value is “4”, and the lottery value when the set value is “5” The illustration is omitted.

  Further, the winning combination determination table for the non-RT gaming state during BB includes the normal replay of the winning number “01”, the chance replay of the winning number “02”, the premium replay of the winning number “03”, and the winning number “15”. The middle tier cherry, the watermelon with the winning number “16”, the cherry with the winning number “17”, the chance number “1” with the winning number “18”, and the chance number “2” with the winning number “19” Push order number “123A” for number “20”, push order bell “132A” for winning number “21”, push order bell “2A” for winning number “22”, push order bell for winning number “23” “312A”, a push order bell “321A” of the winning number “24”, a push order bell “123B” of the win number “25”, a push order bell “132B” of the win number “26”, and a win number “ 27 ”push order bell“ 2 ” And ", and press the order bell of the winning number" 28 "," 312B ", and press the order bell of the winning number" 29 "," 321B ", lottery value to the RB of the winning number" 48 "are defined.

  In other words, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the winning combination determination table for the non-RT gaming state during BB, the replay during RT2 of the winning number “04” and the winning number “05” ”RT3 replay“ 1 ”, winning number“ 06 ”RT3 replay“ 2 ”, winning number“ 07 ”RT3 replay“ 3 ”, and winning number“ 08 ”RT3 replay“ 4 ” The RT3 replay “5” with the winning number “09”, the RT4 replay “1” with the winning number “10”, the RT4 replay “2” with the winning number “11”, and the winning number “12”. RT4 replay “3”, winning number “13” RT4 replay “4”, winning number “14” RT4 replay “5”, winning number “30” BB01 + chance replay and winning number “13” 31 "BB 1+ middle stage cherry, BB01 + watermelon with winning number “32”, BB01 + cherry with winning number “33”, BB01 + chance number “1” with winning number “34”, BB01 + chance number “2” with winning number “35” ”, BB02 + Chance Replay with winning number“ 36 ”, BB02 + Cherry with winning number“ 37 ”, BB02 + watermelon with winning number“ 38 ”, BB02 + cherry with winning number“ 39 ”, and winning number“ 40 ” BB02 + chance number "1", winning number "41" BB02 + chance number "2", winning number "42" BB03 + chance replay, winning number "43" BB03 + middle stage cherry, winning number "44" BB03 + watermelon, winning number “45” BB03 + cherry, winning number “46” BB03 + Chan The eye "1", will not be determined as the winning combination BB03 + chance eyes "2" of the winning number "47".

(Winning role determination table for RB gaming state during BB)
Next, based on FIG. 10, the winning combination determination table for the BB gaming state for BB will be described.

  The BB gaming state winning combination determination table is stored in the main ROM 302, and is used when determining a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the “BB RB gaming state” described later. Further, the winning combination determination table for the BB gaming state for BB specifies a winning number, a winning combination, and a lottery value for each set value. Here, in this embodiment, the winning combination determination table for the RB gaming state during BB illustrates the lottery value when the setting value is “1” and the lottery value when the setting value is “6”. Illustration of a lottery value when the setting value is “2”, a lottery value when the setting value is “3”, a lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and a lottery value when the setting value is “5” Is omitted.

  Also, the winning combination determination table for the RB gaming state in the BB includes the normal replay of the winning number “01”, the chance replay of the winning number “02”, the premium replay of the winning number “03”, and the winning number “15”. Middle tier cherry, watermelon with winning number “16”, cherry with winning number “17”, chance number “1” with winning number “18”, chance number “2” with winning number “19”, winning number "20" push order bell "123A", win number "21" push order bell "132A", win number "22" push order bell "2A", win number "23" push order bell "23A" 312A ”, a push order bell“ 321A ”for the winning number“ 24 ”, a push order bell“ 123B ”for the win number“ 25 ”, a push order bell“ 132B ”for the win number“ 26 ”, and a win number“ 27 ” "2B push order bell" If, and press the order bell of the winning number "28", "312B", lottery value to press the order bell "321B" of the winning number "29" are defined.

  In other words, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the RB in-game RB gaming state winning combination determination table, the RT2 replay with the winning number “04” and the winning number “05” are selected. RT3 replay “1”, winning number “06” RT3 replay “2”, winning number “07” RT3 replay “3”, winning number “08” RT3 replay “4” The replay “5” in RT3 with the winning number “09”, the replay “1” in RT4 with the winning number “10”, the replay “2” in RT4 with the winning number “11”, and the RT4 with the winning number “12”. Middle replay “3”, RT4 replay “4” with winning number “13”, RT4 replay “5” with winning number “14”, BB01 + chance replay with winning number “30”, and winning number “31” BB0 + BB01 + watermelon with winning number “32”, BB01 + cherry with winning number “33”, BB01 + chance number “1” with winning number “34”, BB01 + chance number “2” with winning number “35” ”, BB02 + Chance Replay with winning number“ 36 ”, BB02 + Cherry with winning number“ 37 ”, BB02 + watermelon with winning number“ 38 ”, BB02 + cherry with winning number“ 39 ”, and winning number“ 40 ” BB02 + chance number "1", winning number "41" BB02 + chance number "2", winning number "42" BB03 + chance replay, winning number "43" BB03 + middle stage cherry, winning number "44" BB03 + watermelon, winning number “45” BB03 + cherry, winning number “46” BB03 + chance And "1", BB03 + chance eyes of the winning number "47" and "2", RB of the winning number "48" will not be determined as a winning combination.

(First RT gaming state winning combination determination table)
Next, the winning combination determination table for the first RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The first RT gaming state winning combination determination table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when determining a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the “first RT gaming state” described later. In the first RT gaming state winning combination determination table, a winning number, a winning combination, and a lottery value for each set value are defined. Here, in the present embodiment, the first RT gaming state winning combination determination table illustrates the lottery value when the setting value is “1” and the lottery value when the setting value is “6”. A drawing of a lottery value when the value is “2”, a lottery value when the setting value is “3”, a lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and a lottery value when the setting value is “5” Omitted.

  The first RT gaming state winning combination determination table includes a normal replay with a winning number “01”, a chance replay with a winning number “02”, a premium replay with a winning number “03”, and a watermelon with a winning number “16”. And a cherry with a winning number “17”, a chance item “1” with a winning number “18”, a chance item “2” with a winning number “19”, and a push order bell “123A” with a winning number “20”. , Push order number "21A" push order bell "132A", win number "22" push order bell "2A", win number "23" push order bell "312A" and win number "24" push The order bell “321A”, the order number “123B” of the winning number “25”, the order number “132B” of the winning number “26”, the order number “2B” of the winning number “27”, and the winner Push order number "28" 12B ", push number" 29B "push order bell" 321B ", winning number" 30 "BB01 + chance replay, winning number" 31 "BB01 + middle cherries, winning number" 32 "BB01 + watermelon, Winning number “33” BB01 + Cherry, winning number “34” BB01 + chance “1”, winning number “35” BB01 + chance “2”, winning number “36” BB02 + chance replay, winning BB02 + middle cherry with number "37", BB02 + watermelon with winning number "38", BB02 + cherry with winning number "39", BB02 + chance number "1" with winning number "40", and winning number "41" BB02 + chance “2”, winning number “42” BB03 + chance replay, winning number “43” BB03 + BB03 + watermelon with winning number “44”, BB03 + cherry with winning number “45”, BB03 + chance number “1” with winning number “46”, BB03 + chance number “2” with winning number “47” The lottery value is defined in

  That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when performing the lottery using the first RT gaming state winning combination determining table, the replay during RT2 of the winning number “04” and the winning number “05” RT3 replay “1”, winning number “06” RT3 replay “2”, winning number “07” RT3 replay “3”, winning number “08” RT3 replay “4”, During RT3 replay “5” with winning number “09”, during RT4 replay “1” with winning number “10”, during RT4 replay “2” with winning number “11”, and during RT4 with winning number “12” Replay “3”, winning number “13” RT4 replay “4”, winning number “14” RT4 replay “5”, winning number “15” middle cherry, and winning number “48” RB determined as winning role It will not be.

(2nd RT gaming state winning combination determination table)
Next, the winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The second RT gaming state winning combination determination table is stored in the main ROM 302, and is used when determining a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the “second RT gaming state” described later. In the second RT gaming state winning combination determination table, a winning number, a winning combination, and a lottery value for each set value are defined. Here, in the present embodiment, the second RT gaming state winning combination determination table exemplifies the lottery value when the setting value is “1” and the lottery value when the setting value is “6”. A drawing of a lottery value when the value is “2”, a lottery value when the setting value is “3”, a lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and a lottery value when the setting value is “5” Omitted.

  In addition, the winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state is the chance of the replay during RT2 with the winning number “04”, the watermelon with the winning number “16”, the cherry with the winning number “17”, and the winning number “18”. “1”, chance number “2” of winning number “19”, pushing order number “123A” of winning number “20”, pushing order number “132A” of winning number “21”, and winning number “22” ”Push order bell“ 2A ”, win number“ 23 ”push order bell“ 312A ”, win number“ 24 ”push order bell“ 321A ”, win number“ 25 ”push order bell“ 123B ” And a push order bell “132B” for the winning number “26”, a push order bell “2B” for the win number “27”, a push order bell “312B” for the win number “28”, and a win number “29”. Push order bell “321B” and winning number “30” BB01 + Chance Replay, BB01 + Cherry of the winning number “31”, BB01 + Watermelon of the winning number “32”, BB01 + Cherry of the winning number “33”, BB01 + Chance “1” of the winning number “34”, BB01 + chance number “2” with a winning number “35”, BB02 + chance replay with a winning number “36”, BB02 + middle cherries with a winning number “37”, BB02 + watermelon with a winning number “38”, and a winning number “39” "BB02 + Cherry", winning number "40" BB02 + chance number "1", winning number "41" BB02 + chance number "2", winning number "42" BB03 + chance replay, winning number "43" BB03 + middle cherries, winning number “44” BB03 + watermelon, and winning number “45” B And 03Tasu cherry, and BB03 + chance eyes of the winning number "46" and "1", lottery value to BB03 + chance eyes "2" of the winning number "47" are defined.

  In other words, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state, the normal replay of the winning number “01” and the chance of the winning number “02” Replay, premium replay with winning number “03”, replaying during RT3 with winning number “05”, replaying during RT3 with winning number “06”, and replaying in RT3 with winning number “07” “3”, RT3 replay “4” with winning number “08”, RT3 replay “5” with winning number “09”, RT4 replay “1” with winning number “10”, and winning number “ 11 ”RT4 replay“ 2 ”, winning number“ 12 ”RT4 replay“ 3 ”, winning number“ 13 ”RT4 replay“ 4 ”, and winning number“ 14 ”RT4 replay“ 5 ” "When, And the middle cherry select number "15", is not that the RB of the winning number "48" is determined as a winning combination.

(Winning role determination table for 2nd RT gaming state during BB)
Next, based on FIG. 13, the winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state during BB will be described.

  The BB second RT gaming state winning combination determination table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when determining a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the “BB second RT gaming state” described later. In the BB second RT gaming state winning combination determination table, a winning number, a winning combination, and a lottery value for each set value are defined. Here, in this embodiment, the winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state during BB illustrates the lottery value when the setting value is “1” and the lottery value when the setting value is “6”. The lottery value when the set value is “2”, the lottery value when the set value is “3”, the lottery value when the set value is “4”, and the lottery value when the set value is “5” The illustration is omitted.

  Further, the winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state during the BB includes the chance replay of the winning number “02”, the replaying of the winning number “04” during RT2, the middle cherries of the winning number “15”, and the winning number “16”. ”, A cherry with a winning number“ 17 ”, a chance item“ 1 ”with a winning number“ 18 ”, a chance item“ 2 ”with a winning number“ 19 ”, and a pressing order bell“ 20 ” 123A ”, the push order bell“ 132A ”of the winning number“ 21 ”, the push order bell“ 2A ”of the win number“ 22 ”, the push order bell“ 312A ”of the win number“ 23 ”, and the win number“ 24 ” ”Push order bell“ 321A ”, win number“ 25 ”push order bell“ 123B ”, win number“ 26 ”push order bell“ 132B ”, win number“ 27 ”push order bell“ 2B ” And the order of the winning number “28”. And "312B", and press the order bell of the winning number "29", "321B", lottery value to the RB of the winning number "48" are defined.

  In other words, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the second RT gaming state winning combination determination table in BB, the normal replay of the winning number “01” and the winning number “03” Premium replay, RT3 replay “1” with winning number “05”, RT3 replay “2” with winning number “06”, RT3 replay “3” with winning number “07”, and winning number “ Replay “4” during RT3 with “08”, Replay “5” during RT3 with winning number “09”, Replay “1” during RT4 with winning number “10”, and Replay “2” during RT4 with winning number “11” ”, A replay during RT4“ 3 ”with a winning number“ 12 ”, a replay“ 4 ”during RT4 with a winning number“ 13 ”, a replay“ 5 ”during RT4 with a winning number“ 14 ”, and a winning number“ 30 ”. BB01 + cha BB01 + middle cherry with winning number “31”, BB01 + watermelon with winning number “32”, BB01 + cherry with winning number “33”, BB01 + chance number “1” with winning number “34”, winning number “35” BB01 + chance “2”, winning number “36” BB02 + chance replay, winning number “37” BB02 + middle cherries, winning number “38” BB02 + watermelon, and winning number “39” BB02 + Cherry, BB02 + chance number “1” with winning number “40”, BB02 + chance number “2” with winning number “41”, BB03 + chance replay with winning number “42”, and BB03 + with winning number “43” Middle cherries, winning number “44” BB03 + watermelon, winning number “45” BB03 + cherry , BB03 + chance eyes of the winning number "46" and "1", will not be determined as the winning combination BB03 + chance eyes "2" of the winning number "47".

(3rd RT gaming state winning combination determination table)
Next, the winning combination determination table for the third RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The third RT gaming state winning combination determination table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when determining a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the “third RT gaming state” described later. In the third RT gaming state winning combination determination table, a winning number, a winning combination, and a lottery value for each set value are defined. Here, in the present embodiment, the third RT gaming state winning combination determination table illustrates the lottery value when the setting value is “1” and the lottery value when the setting value is “6”. A drawing of a lottery value when the value is “2”, a lottery value when the setting value is “3”, a lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and a lottery value when the setting value is “5” Omitted.

  In addition, the winning combination determination table for the third RT gaming state includes a normal replay with a winning number “01”, a replay “1” during RT3 with a winning number “05”, and a replay “2” during RT3 with a winning number “06”. The RT3 replay “3” with the winning number “07”, the RT3 replay “4” with the winning number “08”, the RT3 replay “5” with the winning number “09”, and the “16” “ "Watermelon", "Cherry" with winning number "17", chance number "1" with winning number "18", chance number "2" with winning number "19", and pressing number "20" “123A”, the push order bell “132A” of the winning number “21”, the push order bell “2A” of the win number “22”, the push order bell “312A” of the win number “23”, and the win number “ 24 ”push order bell“ 321A ”and winning number 25 ”push order bell“ 123B ”, win number“ 26 ”push order bell“ 132B ”, win number“ 27 ”push order bell“ 2B ”, win number“ 28 ”push order bell“ 312B ” ”, Winning number“ 29 ”push order bell“ 321B ”, winning number“ 30 ”BB01 + chance replay, winning number“ 31 ”BB01 + middle cherries, winning number“ 32 ”BB01 + watermelon, BB01 + cherry with number “33”, BB01 + chance “1” with winning number “34”, BB01 + chance “2” with winning number “35”, BB02 + chance replay with winning number “36”, and winning number "37" BB02 + middle cherries, winning number "38" BB02 + watermelon, winning number "39" BB02 + cherry, winning number "40" BB 2+ chance chance “1”, winning number “41” BB02 + chance eye “2”, winning number “42” BB03 + chance replay, winning number “43” BB03 + middle cherry, and winning number “44” Lottery values are defined for BB03 + watermelon, BB03 + cherry with winning number “45”, BB03 + chance number “1” with winning number “46”, and BB03 + chance number “2” with winning number “47”.

  That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and in the case of performing the lottery using the third RT gaming state winning combination determination table, the chance replay of the winning number “02” and the premium of the winning number “03” are used. Replay, replay during RT2 with winning number “04”, replay during RT4 with winning number “10”, replay “2” during RT4 with winning number “11”, and RT4 with winning number “12” Replay “3”, winning number “13” RT4 replay “4”, winning number “14” RT4 replay “5”, winning number “15” middle cherry, and winning number “48” RB will not be determined as a winning role.

(Winning role determination table for 3rd RT gaming state during BB)
Next, the winning combination determination table for the third RT gaming state during BB will be described with reference to FIG.

  The third RT gaming state winning combination determination table for BB is stored in the main ROM 302, and is used when determining a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the “third RT gaming state during BB” described later. In the BB third RT gaming state winning combination determination table, a winning number, a winning combination, and a lottery value for each set value are defined. Here, in this embodiment, the winning combination determination table for the third RT gaming state during BB illustrates the lottery value when the setting value is “1” and the lottery value when the setting value is “6”. The lottery value when the set value is “2”, the lottery value when the set value is “3”, the lottery value when the set value is “4”, and the lottery value when the set value is “5” The illustration is omitted.

  In addition, the winning combination determination table for the 3rd RT gaming state during the BB includes the normal replay of the winning number “01”, the chance replay of the winning number “02”, the replay “1” during the RT3 of the winning number “05”, and the winning Replay during RT3 with number “06”, Replay during RT3 with winning number “07”, Replay during RT3 with winning number “08”, and Replay during RT3 with winning number “09” “5”, middle cherries with winning number “15”, watermelon with winning number “16”, cherry with winning number “17”, chance number “1” with winning number “18”, winning number “19” ”Chance chance“ 2 ”, winning number“ 20 ”push order bell“ 123A ”, winning number“ 21 ”push order bell“ 132A ”, winning number“ 22 ”push order bell“ 2A ” , The order of pushing the winning number “23” “312A”, a push order bell “321A” of the winning number “24”, a push order bell “123B” of the win number “25”, a push order bell “132B” of the win number “26”, and a win number “ The lottery values are defined for the push order bell “2B” of 27 ”, the push order bell“ 312B ”of the win number“ 28 ”, and the push order bell“ 321B ”of the win number“ 29 ”.

  In other words, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the third RT gaming state winning combination determination table during BB, the premium replay of the winning number “03” and the winning number “04” are used. RT2 replay, RT4 replay “1” with winning number “10”, RT4 replay “2” with winning number “11”, RT4 replay “3” with winning number “12”, and winning number “13” RT4 replay “4”, winning number “14” RT4 replay “5”, winning number “30” BB01 + chance replay, winning number “31” BB01 + middle cherries, winning number BB01 + watermelon with “32”, BB01 + cherry with winning number “33”, BB01 + chance “1” with winning number “34”, BB01 + chi with winning number “35” BB02 + Chance Replay with winning number "36", BB02 + middle cherry with winning number "37", BB02 + watermelon with winning number "38", BB02 + cherry with winning number "39" BB02 with chance "40" + chance number "1", winning number "41" with BB02 + chance number "2", winning number "42" with BB03 + chance replay, winning number "43" with BB03 + middle stage cherry, winning BB03 + watermelon with the number “44”, BB03 + cherry with the winning number “45”, BB03 + the chance number “1” with the winning number “46”, BB03 + the chance number “2” with the winning number “47”, and the winning number “ 48 "RB will not be determined as a winning combination.

(Winning role determination table for 4th RT gaming state)
Next, based on FIG. 16, the 4RT gaming state winning combination determination table will be described.

  The fourth RT gaming state winning combination determination table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when determining a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the “4RT gaming state” described later. In the fourth RT gaming state winning combination determination table, a winning number, a winning combination, and a lottery value for each set value are defined. Here, in the present embodiment, the 4RT gaming state winning combination determination table illustrates the lottery value when the setting value is “1” and the lottery value when the setting value is “6”. A drawing of a lottery value when the value is “2”, a lottery value when the setting value is “3”, a lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and a lottery value when the setting value is “5” Omitted.

  Further, the winning combination determination table for the fourth RT gaming state includes a normal replay with a winning number “01”, a replay “1” during RT4 with a winning number “10”, and a replay “2” during RT4 with a winning number “11”. The RT4 replay “3” with the winning number “12”, the RT4 replay “4” with the winning number “13”, the RT4 replay “5” with the winning number “14”, and the watermelon with the winning number “16”. And a cherry with a winning number “17”, a chance item “1” with a winning number “18”, a chance item “2” with a winning number “19”, and a push order bell “123A” with a winning number “20”. , Push order number "21A" push order bell "132A", win number "22" push order bell "2A", win number "23" push order bell "312A" and win number "24" push Order bell “321A” and winning number “25” Push order bell “123B”, push order bell “132B” of winning number “26”, push order bell “2B” of winning number “27”, push order bell “312B” of winning number “28”, Winning number “29” push order bell “321B”, winning number “30” BB01 + chance replay, winning number “31” BB01 + middle cherries, winning number “32” BB01 + watermelon, and winning number “33” BB01 + Cherry, winning number “34”, BB01 + chance “1”, winning number “35”, BB01 + chance “2”, winning number “36”, BB02 + chance replay, and winning number “37” BB02 + middle cherry, BB02 + watermelon with winning number “38”, BB02 + cherry with winning number “39”, BB02 + chi with winning number “40” BB02 + chance number "2" with winning number "41", BB03 + chance replay with winning number "42", BB03 + middle stage cherry with winning number "43", and BB03 + with winning number "44" Lottery values are defined for watermelon, BB03 + cherry with winning number “45”, BB03 + chance “1” with winning number “46”, and BB03 + chance “2” with winning number “47”.

  That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when performing the lottery using the fourth RT gaming state winning combination determination table, “chance replay” of the winning number “02” and the winning number “03” “Premium Replay”, Winning Number “04” RT2 Replay, Winning Number “05” RT3 Replay “1”, Winning Number “06” RT3 Replay “2”, and Winning Number “07” "RT3 replay" 3 ", winning number" 08 "RT3 replay" 4 ", winning number" 09 "RT3 replay" 5 ", winning number" 15 "middle cherry, and winning number An RB of “48” will not be determined as a winning combination.

(5th RT gaming state winning combination determination table)
Next, the winning combination determination table for the fifth RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The fifth RT gaming state winning combination determination table is stored in the main ROM 302, and is used when determining a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in “5th RT gaming state” described later. In the fifth RT gaming state winning combination determination table, a winning number, a winning combination, and a lottery value for each set value are defined. Here, in the present embodiment, the fifth RT gaming state winning combination determination table illustrates the lottery value when the setting value is “1” and the lottery value when the setting value is “6”. A drawing of a lottery value when the value is “2”, a lottery value when the setting value is “3”, a lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and a lottery value when the setting value is “5” Omitted.

  In addition, the winning combination determination table for the 5th RT gaming state includes the normal replay of the winning number “01”, the chance replay of the winning number “02”, the middle cherries of the winning number “15”, and the watermelon of the winning number “16”. And a cherry with a winning number “17”, a chance item “1” with a winning number “18”, a chance item “2” with a winning number “19”, and a push order bell “123A” with a winning number “20”. , Push order number "21A" push order bell "132A", win number "22" push order bell "2A", win number "23" push order bell "312A" and win number "24" push The order bell “321A”, the order number “123B” of the winning number “25”, the order number “132B” of the winning number “26”, the order number “2B” of the winning number “27”, and the winner Push order number “312” of number “28” "Said lottery value to press the order bell" 321B "of the winning number" 29 "are defined.

  In other words, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the winning combination determination table for the 5th RT gaming state, the premium replay of the winning number “03” and the RT2 of the winning number “04” Replay “1” during RT3 with winning number “05”, Replay “2” during RT3 with winning number “06”, Replay “3” during RT3 with winning number “07”, and winning number “08” ”RT3 replay“ 4 ”, winning number“ 09 ”RT3 replay“ 5 ”, winning number“ 10 ”RT4 replay“ 1 ”, and winning number“ 11 ”RT4 replay“ 2 ” The RT4 replay “3” with the winning number “12”, the RT4 replay “4” with the winning number “13”, the RT4 replay “5” with the winning number “14”, and the winning number “30”. BB01 + Chan Replay, winning number “31” BB01 + middle cherries, winning number “32” BB01 + watermelon, winning number “33” BB01 + cherry, winning number “34” BB01 + chance “1”, winning number “35” BB01 + chance “2”, winning number “36” BB02 + chance replay, winning number “37” BB02 + middle cherries, winning number “38” BB02 + watermelon, and winning number “39” BB02 + Cherry, BB02 + chance number “1” with winning number “40”, BB02 + chance number “2” with winning number “41”, BB03 + chance replay with winning number “42”, and BB03 + with winning number “43” Middle cherries, BB03 + watermelon with winning number “44”, BB03 + cherry with winning number “45” BB03 + chance eyes of the winning number "46" and "1", and BB03 + chance eyes of the winning number "47", "2", RB of the winning number "48" will not be determined as a winning combination.

  In this embodiment, normal replay, chance replay, premium replay, RT2 replay, RT3 replay “1”, RT3 replay “2”, RT3 replay “3”, and RT3 Replay “4”, RT3 replay “5”, RT4 replay “1”, RT4 replay “2”, RT4 replay “3”, RT4 replay “4”, and RT4 replay “ “5” is collectively referred to as “replay”. Also, RT3 replay “1”, RT3 replay “2”, RT3 replay “3”, RT3 replay “4”, and RT3 replay “5” are collectively referred to as RT3 replay. RT4 replay “1”, RT4 replay “2”, RT4 replay “3”, RT4 replay “4”, and RT4 replay “5” are collectively referred to as RT4 replay. Also, a replay during RT3 “1”, a replay during RT3 “2”, a replay during RT3 “3”, a replay during RT3 “4”, a replay during RT3 “5”, and a replay during RT4 “1”, RT4 replay “2”, RT4 replay “3”, RT4 replay “4”, and RT4 replay “5” are collectively referred to as push order replay.

  In the present embodiment, the middle cherries and cherries are collectively referred to as cherries, the chance eyes “1” and the chance eyes “2” are collectively referred to as chance eyes, the push order bell “123A”, the push order. Bell “132A”, push order bell “2A”, push order bell “312A”, push order bell “321A”, push order bell “123B”, push order bell “132B”, push order bell “2B”, push order bell “312B” and the push order bell “321B” are collectively referred to as a push order bell.

  In the present embodiment, a “non-RT gaming state winning combination determination table”, a “BB non-RT gaming state winning combination determination table”, a “BB RB gaming state winning combination determination table”, and “ “First RT gaming state winning combination determination table”, “Second RT gaming state winning combination determination table”, “BB second RT gaming state winning combination determination table”, and “3rd RT gaming state winning combination determination table” , “BB 3rd RT gaming state winning combination determination table”, “4th RT gaming state winning combination determination table”, and “5th RT gaming state winning combination determination table” are collectively referred to as “winning combination determination” It is called “table”.

(Game state transition diagram)
Next, based on FIG. 18, a game state transition diagram will be described.

  The game state transition diagram defines a current game state, a transition condition that is a condition for transitioning the game state, and a game state of a transition destination.

  Here, when the current gaming state is “non-RT gaming state”, when “BB” is won as a winning combination in the internal lottery process described later, the “5th RT gaming state” is changed from “non-RT gaming state”. "

  Further, when the current gaming state is the “first RT gaming state”, when “BB” is won as the winning combination in the internal lottery process described later, the “first RT gaming state” to the “fifth RT gaming state” In the case where the current gaming state is “first RT gaming state”, in the internal lottery process described later, “Premium Replay” is won as a winning combination, and “the combination of symbols relating to the third RT gaming state transition replay” "Is displayed on the active line, the" first RT gaming state "is shifted to the" third RT gaming state ".

  Further, when the current gaming state is the “second RT gaming state”, “premium replay” is won as the winning combination in the internal lottery process described later, and the “combination of symbols relating to the third RT gaming state transition replay” is selected. When displayed on the active line, the “second RT gaming state” is shifted to the “third RT gaming state”. In the case of the “second RT gaming state during BB” described later, if more than “53” (medals) are paid out, the “second RT gaming state during BB” is changed to “second RT gaming state”. In this case, even if the “premium replay” is not selected as the winning role, the “combination of symbols related to the third RT gaming state transition replay” is displayed on the active line. Is displayed, and the “combination of symbols relating to the third RT gaming state transition replay” is displayed on the active line, whereby the “second RT gaming state” is shifted to the “third RT gaming state”.

  When the current gaming state is the “third RT gaming state”, in the internal lottery process described later, one of the RT3 replay “1” to the RT3 replay “5” is won as the winning combination, When the “combination of symbols relating to the 4RT gaming state transition replay” is displayed on the active line, the state shifts from the “third RT gaming state” to the “fourth RT gaming state”.

  Further, when the current gaming state is the “fourth RT gaming state”, in the internal lottery process described later, one of the RT4 replay “1” to the RT4 replay “5” is won as the winning combination, When the “combination of symbols relating to the 1RT gaming state transition replay” is displayed on the active line, the state shifts from the “fourth RT gaming state” to the “first RT gaming state”.

  Further, when the current gaming state is the “fifth RT gaming state” and the “combination of symbols related to BB” is displayed on the active line, the “second RT gaming during BB” is changed from the “fifth RT gaming state”. Transition to "state".

  In addition, when the current gaming state is “the second RT gaming state during BB”, when “53” (medals) are paid out, the “second RT gaming state during BB” is changed from the “second RT gaming state during BB” to the “second” When “2RT gaming state” is entered and the current gaming state is “second RT gaming state during BB”, when “combination of symbols related to RB” is displayed on the active line, “second RT during BB” If the game state is changed to “RB game state during BB” and the current game state is “second RT game state during BB”, and “RB carryover” is being performed, then “second RT game during BB”. The state is shifted to “the third RT gaming state during BB”.

  Further, when the current gaming state is “the third RT gaming state during BB” and “53” (medal) payout has been made, the “third RT gaming state during BB” is changed from the “third RT gaming state during BB” to the “first “3RT gaming state” is entered.

  In addition, when the current gaming state is “BB RB gaming state” and “4 wins or 4 games” are performed, “BB RB gaming state” is changed to “BB non-RT gaming”. In the case where the current gaming state is “BB RB gaming state”, and more than “53” (medals) are paid out, “BB RB gaming state” Transition to “non-RT gaming state”.

  Further, when the current gaming state is “non-RT gaming state during BB” and “combination of symbols related to RB” is displayed on the active line, “BB non-RT gaming state during BB” is changed to “BB If the current gaming state is “non-RT gaming state during BB” and “RB carryover” is in progress, the state is changed from “non-RT gaming state during BB” to “in BB gaming state”. When the game state is shifted to the “3rd RT gaming state” and the current gaming state is “non-RT gaming state during BB”, if more than “53” (medals) are paid out, “RT gaming state” is shifted to “non-RT gaming state”.

(List of states managed by the main control board)
Next, a list of states managed by the main control board will be described based on FIG. In FIG. 19, the correspondence with terms used in the flowcharts described later will also be described.

(Normal state)
The “normal state” of the number “01” is a disadvantageous state for the player. The “normal state” corresponds to normal “1” or normal “2” in the flowchart described later.

(First carryover state)
The “first carryover state” with the number “02” is, for example, a state that shifts by winning “BB” in the “normal state”, and is a state that is more advantageous to the player than the “normal state”. The “first carryover state” corresponds to “1” in the interior (state where the effect state counter is less than “4”) in the flowchart described later.

(Second carryover state)
The “second carryover state” with the number “03” is, for example, a state that shifts when the performance state counter becomes “4” or more in the “first carryover state”, and is a game compared to the “normal state”. This is an advantageous state for the person. The “second carryover state” corresponds to “1” in the interior (state where the effect state counter is “4” or more) in the flowchart described later.

(Normal BB state)
The “normal BB state” with the number “04” is a state in which, for example, “BB” is won in the “normal state” and the state moves to after the “first carryover state” or “second carryover state”. This is a more advantageous state for the player than the “state”. The “normal BB state” corresponds to the accessory operation “1” in the flowchart described later.

(Special BB state)
The “special BB state” with the number “05” is, for example, a state in which “BB” is won in the “normal state” and a transition is made after passing the “first carryover state” or the “second carryover state”. Note that the “special BB state” is a state that operates under the condition that the condition for shifting to the ART state is satisfied, and thus is more advantageous than the “normal BB state” in which the transition to the ART state is not confirmed. It can be said that it is in a state. The “special BB state” corresponds to the accessory operation “1” in the flowchart described later.

(ART state)
The “ART state” of the number “06” is, for example, a state in which a transition lottery in the “normal BB state” is won or a state in which a transition is made after passing the “special BB state”. Since the order is notified, it can be said that the “push order bell” is more advantageous than the “normal state” in which the operation order is not notified. The “ART state” corresponds to the designated game “2” in the flowchart described later.

(First carryover state during ART)
The number “07” “first carryover state during ART” is, for example, a state in which “BB” is won in “ART state”, and is compared to “normal state” and “first carryover state”. This is an advantageous state for the player. The “first carry-over state during ART” corresponds to “2” inside (state where the performance state counter during ART is less than “4”) in the flowchart described later.

(Second carryover state during ART)
The “second carry-over state during ART” with the number “08” is a state in which, for example, in the “first carry-over state during ART”, the transition is made when the production state counter during ART becomes “4” or more. This is an advantageous state for the player compared to the “state” and the “second carryover state”. Note that “the second carry-over state during ART” corresponds to “2” inside (the state state counter during ART is “4” or more) in the flowchart described later.

(Normal BB state during ART)
The “normal BB state during ART” numbered “09”, for example, wins “BB” in the “ART state” and moves after passing the “first carryover state during ART” or the “second carryover state during ART”. This is a state that is more advantageous to the player than the “normal state” or “normal BB state”. The “normal BB state during ART” corresponds to the accessory operation “2” in the flowchart described later.

(Special BB state during ART)
The number “10” special BB state during ART is selected as “BB” in the “first ART added state” or “second ART added state”, for example, and the “first carryover state during ART” or “art state during ART” This is a state in which the transition is made after the “2 carryover state”. Since the transition to the “first ART added state” is determined after the “art BB state during ART” is completed, the transition to the “first ART added state” is not determined from the “normal BB state during ART”. It can be said that this is an advantageous state. The “art BB state during ART” corresponds to the accessory operation “3” in the flowchart described later.

(First ART on top)
The “first ART added state” of the number “11” is, for example, a state that shifts after the end of the “art BB state during ART”, and the number of games (number of sets) that the player can play in the “ART state” is added. It can be said that this is a more advantageous state than the “ART state”. Note that the first ART added state is a state in which the number of games in the second ART added state is acquired. In the second ART added state, the number of games that the player can play in the “ART state” using the acquired number of games ( The number of sets) is added. Accordingly, it can be said that the first ART added state is a state where the number of games (number of sets) that the player can play in the “ART state” is indirectly added. The “first ART added state” corresponds to an instruction game “4” in the flowchart described later.

(Second ART on top)
The “second ART added state” of the number “12” is, for example, a state in which the transition is made after the “first ART added state” is completed, and an additional number of games (number of sets) that the player can play in the “ART state”. Since this is a state to be performed, it can be said to be a more advantageous state than the “ART state”. It can be said that the second ART added state is a state in which the number of games (number of sets) that the player can play in the “ART state” is directly added. The “second ART added state” corresponds to the instruction game “5” in the flowchart described later.

(Infinite ART state)
The “infinite ART state” with the number “13” is a state in which, for example, a transition is made when “Premium Replay” is won in the normal state. Since the “ART state” is composed of “1” set “40” games, the “infinite ART state” is a state that continues until “BB” is won. It can be said that it is a more advantageous state than "." The “infinite ART state” corresponds to the instruction game “3” in the flowchart described later.

(ART continuous production state)
The number “14” “ART continuation effect state” is, for example, a state that shifts from the “ART state”, and the “ART state” continues to the next set or the “ART state” does not continue. This is a state in which it is informed by the effect whether the process ends. The “ART continuous effect state” corresponds to the “continuous effect state” in the flowchart described later.

(ART ready state)
The “ART ready state” of the number “15” is a state in which, for example, in the “normal BB state”, when “BB” is finished without winning “RB”, transition is made after the end of the “BB”. . In other words, if “BB” is ended without winning “RB”, it will shift to “ART state”, so “RB” is won and “BB” is set in the “RB carryover” state. It can be said that this is an advantageous state compared to the case where the process is terminated (when the transition to the ART state is not determined). The “ART ready state” corresponds to the instruction game “1” in the flowchart described later.

(State transition diagram managed by the main control board)
Next, a state transition diagram managed by the main control board will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in the “normal state”, when “BB” (for example, winning numbers “30” to “47”) is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the “first state” is changed to the “first state”. Transition to “carry-over state”. In “normal state”, “Premium Replay” (for example, winning number “03”) is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, and “a combination of symbols related to the third RT gaming state transition replay” is effective. When displayed on the line, the state shifts from the “normal state” to the “infinite ART state”. In the present embodiment, only the route from the “normal state” to the “infinite ART state” is provided. When “Watermelon” or “Cherry” with the winning number “17” is determined, a lottery to shift to the “ART state” is performed, and when the transition lottery is won, the “normal state” is changed to the “ART state”. May be transferred to.

  Next, in the “first carryover state”, when the effect state counter becomes “4” or more, the “first carryover state” shifts to the “second carryover state”. The production state counter is set to “0” when the state shifts to the “first carryover state”, and every time the “1” game is consumed (for example, when the start lever 10 is operated). As) counts up. That is, in the “4” game in the “first carryover state”, the “first carryover state” is shifted to the “second carryover state”. In the “first carryover state”, “a combination of symbols related to BB” is displayed on the active line, an instruction state flag described later is not “2”, and a chance replay ceiling number counter described later is “0”. If not, the process proceeds from the “first carryover state” to the “normal BB state”. In the “first carryover state”, “a combination of symbols related to BB” is displayed on the active line, an instruction state flag described later is “2”, or a chance replay ceiling number counter described later is “0”. If it is, the state shifts from the “first carryover state” to the “special BB state”. The effect state counter is provided in the main RAM 303.

  Next, in the “second carryover state”, “a combination of symbols related to BB” is displayed on the active line, an instruction state flag described later is not “2”, and a chance replay ceiling number counter described later is “0”. If not, the process proceeds from the “second carryover state” to the “normal BB state”. In the “second carryover state”, “a combination of symbols related to BB” is displayed on the active line, an instruction state flag described later is “2”, or a chance replay ceiling number counter described later is “0”. If it is, the state shifts from the “second carryover state” to the “special BB state”.

  Next, in the “normal BB state”, when the end condition of “BB” is satisfied and the number of ART sets described later is “0”, the state shifts from the “normal BB state” to the “normal state”. . In the “normal BB state”, when the end condition of “BB” is satisfied and the number of ART sets described later is “1” or more, the “normal BB state” is changed to the “ART state”. . In the “normal BB state”, when the end condition of “BB” is satisfied and the RT gaming state is the second RT gaming state, the “normal BB state” is changed to the “ART state”.

  Next, in the “special BB state”, when the end condition of “BB” is satisfied, the “special BB state” is shifted to the “ART state”.

  Next, in the “ART state”, when “BB” (for example, winning numbers “30” to “47”) is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the “ART state” to the “ART state” are determined. Transition to “Middle first carryover state”. Further, in the “ART state”, when the first ART added state transition lottery is won, the “ART state” is shifted to the “first ART added state”. Further, in the “ART state”, when an instruction game “2” game remaining number counter described later is “0”, the state shifts from the “ART state” to the “ART continuous effect state”.

  Next, in the “first carry-over state during ART”, when the performance state counter during ART becomes “4” or more, the state shifts from the “first carry-over state during ART” to the “second carry-over state during ART”. In addition, in the “first carryover state during ART”, when the “combination of symbols related to BB” is displayed on the active line and the later-described accessory operation “3” flag is OFF, Transition from “carry-over state” to “normal BB state during ART”. In addition, in the “first carryover state during ART”, when the “combination of symbols related to BB” is displayed on the active line and the later-described accessory operation “3” flag is ON, Transition from “carry-over state” to “art BB state during ART”.

  Next, in the “second carryover state during ART”, when “the combination of symbols related to BB” is displayed on the active line and the later-described accessory operation “3” flag is OFF, Transition from “2 carryover state” to “normal BB state during ART”. In addition, in the “second carryover state during ART”, when the “combination of symbols related to BB” is displayed on the active line and the later-described accessory operation “3” flag is ON, Transition from “carry-over state” to “art BB state during ART”.

  Next, in the “normal BB state during ART”, when the end condition of “BB” is satisfied and the first ART added state transition lottery is won, the “ART state” is changed to “the first ART added state”. In the “normal BB state during ART”, if the end condition of “BB” is satisfied and the first ART additional state transition lottery is not won, the “normal BB state during ART” is changed to “ART Transition to "state".

  Next, in the “art special BB state”, when the end condition of “BB” is satisfied, the state shifts from the “special BB state during ART” to the “first ART added state”.

  Next, when “BB” (for example, winning numbers “30” to “47”) is determined as a winning combination by the internal lottery process described later in the “first ART added state”, the “first ART added state” To “the first carryover state during ART”. In addition, in the “first ART added state”, when the lottery for continuing the “first ART added state” is won, the “first ART added state” is performed again. Here, the “first ART added state” is composed of “1” set “10” games, and a continuous lottery is performed in each game of the “10” games. When the game is continued, after the “1” set “10” game is digested, the “first ART added state” of the new “1” set “10” game is started. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery between the “10” games is not the continuation, the state shifts from the “first ART added state” to the “second ART added state”.

  Next, in the “second ART added state”, when an instruction game “5” remaining game counter, which will be described later, is “0”, the state shifts from the “second ART added state” to the “ART state”. In addition, when “BB” (for example, winning numbers “30” to “47”) is determined as a winning combination in the “second ART added state” by an internal lottery process to be described later, “second ART added state” To “the first carryover state during ART”.

  Next, in the “infinite ART state”, when “BB” (for example, winning numbers “30” to “47”) is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the “infinite ART state” Transition to “first carryover state during ART”. In the “infinite ART state”, a lottery for determining whether or not to add an instruction game “5” remaining game counter, which will be described later, is performed.

  Next, when the number of remaining ART sets is “0” in the “ART continuous effect state”, the state shifts from the “ART continuous effect state” to the “normal state”. In the “ART continuous effect state”, when the remaining ART set number is not “0”, the state shifts from the “ART continuous effect state” to the “ART state”. Further, in the “ART continuous effect state”, when “BB” (for example, winning numbers “30” to “47”) is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, the “ART continuous effect state” To “the first carryover state during ART”.

  Next, in the “ART ready state”, when the “combination of symbols relating to the third RT gaming state transition replay” is displayed on the active line, the state shifts from the “ART ready state” to the “ART state”. In the “ART ready state”, when “BB” (for example, winning numbers “30” to “47”) is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, the “ART ready state” is changed to “ Transition to “first carryover state during ART”.

(Instruction game lottery table “1”)
Next, the instruction game lottery table “1” will be described with reference to FIG.

  The instruction game lottery table “1” is provided in the main ROM 302 and is provided for the main CPU 301 to determine an instruction state flag after the setting value is changed by performing a setting value changing process described later. . Here, the instruction state flag is a flag for determining a mode in the “normal state”, and includes three types of flags: an instruction state flag “0”, an instruction state flag “1”, and an instruction state flag “2”. ing. In addition, the instruction state flag is advantageous to the player because of the relationship of “0” <“1” <“2”. For example, when the instruction state flag is “2”, “BB” is won. Although it is determined that the state shifts to the “ART state” after the end of “BB”, even if “BB” is won when the instruction state flag is “0” and the instruction state flag is “1”, “BB” Transition to the “ART state” after completion is not determined. In addition, the instruction state flag may be mode-up (promotion to a more advantageous mode) based on the winning combination, or mode down (demotion to a more unfavorable mode) based on the winning combination. The main RAM 303 is provided with an instruction state flag storage area for storing the current instruction state flag.

  In the instruction game lottery table “1”, random numbers are extracted from a random number range of “0” to “255”. For example, if the extracted random number is “0”, the reference field “2” is set. If it is referred (probability of 1/256) and the extracted random number is a value in the range of “1” to “76”, the reference column “1” is referred (probability of 76/256) and the extracted random If the numerical value is in the range of “77” to “255”, the reference column “0” is referred to (probability of 179/256). Since the value in the reference field corresponds to the value in the instruction state flag, when the reference field “2” is referred to, the instruction state flag to be determined is “2”, and the reference field “1” is referred to. In this case, the determined instruction state flag is “1”, and when the reference field “0” is referred to, the determined instruction state flag is “0”. Then, the determined instruction state flag is stored in an instruction state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. The mode corresponding to the instruction state flag “0” is “normal mode”, the mode corresponding to the instruction state flag “1” is “high accuracy mode”, and the mode corresponding to the instruction state flag “2” is “ultra high accuracy”. Sometimes called "mode." In addition, the instruction state flag may be simply referred to as “mode”.

(Instruction game lottery table “2”)
Next, the instruction game lottery table “2” will be described with reference to FIG. The instruction game lottery table “2” is provided in the main ROM 302, and is provided for the main CPU 301 to perform mode promotion or mode demotion based on the winning combination in each game in the “normal state”. Yes.

(When the current instruction status flag is “0”)
When the current instruction state flag is “0”, when the winning number “00” is determined as the winning combination, the mode promotion and the mode down lottery itself are not performed. If any of the winning numbers “16”, “32”, “38”, “44” is determined as the winning combination, the mode is promoted to the instruction state flag “2” with a probability of “5/256”. It is determined that the mode is promoted to the instruction state flag “1” with a probability of “46/256”, and it is determined that the mode is not promoted with a probability of “205/256”. If any of the winning numbers “17”, “33”, “39”, and “45” is determined as the winning combination, the mode is promoted to the instruction state flag “1” with a probability of “26/256”. And decide not to promote the mode with a probability of “230/256”. If any of the winning numbers “02”, “30”, “36”, “42” is determined as the winning combination, the mode is promoted to the instruction state flag “1” with a probability of “85/256”. And decide not to promote the mode with a probability of “171/256”. In addition, when the winning number “01” is determined as the winning combination, the mode promotion and the mode down lottery are not performed.

(When the current instruction status flag is “1”)
When the current instruction state flag is “1”, when the winning number “00” is determined as the winning combination, the mode promotion and mode demotion lottery itself is not performed. If any of the winning numbers “16”, “32”, “38”, “44” is determined as the winning combination, the mode is promoted to the instruction state flag “2” with a probability of “5/256”. And decide not to promote the mode with a probability of “251/256”. In addition, when any of the winning numbers “17”, “33”, “39”, and “45” is determined as the winning combination, the mode promotion and mode demotion lottery itself is not performed. If any of the winning numbers “02”, “30”, “36”, “42” is determined as the winning combination, the mode is promoted to the instruction state flag “2” with a probability of “5/256”. And decide not to promote the mode with a probability of “251/256”. In addition, when the winning number “01” is determined as the winning combination, it is determined that the mode is not demoted to the instruction state flag “0” with the probability of “128/256”, and the instruction with the probability of “128/256” Decide to demote the mode to status flag “0”.

(When the current instruction status flag is “2”)
When the current instruction state flag is “2”, if the winning number “00” is determined as the winning combination, the mode demotion lottery itself is not performed. Further, when any of the winning numbers “16”, “32”, “38”, and “44” is determined as the winning combination, the mode demotion lottery itself is not performed. Further, when any of the winning numbers “17”, “33”, “39”, and “45” is determined as the winning combination, the mode demotion lottery itself is not performed. Further, when any of the winning numbers “02”, “30”, “36”, “42” is determined as the winning combination, the mode demotion lottery itself is not performed. If the winning number “01” is determined as the winning combination, it is determined that the mode is not demoted to the instruction state flag “1” with the probability of “128/256”, and the instruction with the probability of “128/256”. Decide to demote the mode to status flag “1”.

(Instruction game lottery table “3”)
Next, based on FIG. 22, the instruction game lottery table “3” will be described. The instruction game lottery table “3” is provided in the main ROM 302, and the main CPU 301 sets in the ART state based on the winning combination in each game in the “normal BB state (actual object operation“ 1 ”)”. It is provided to perform a lottery to acquire the number (to perform a lottery for shifting to the ART state). In addition, in the instruction game lottery table “3”, “BB” winning when the instruction state flag is “2” is determined to shift to “ART state” after “BB” ends as described above. A lottery value when the instruction state flag is “0” and when the instruction state flag is “1” is determined for each winning combination and set value.

(The current instruction status flag is “0” and the winning numbers are “00” to “14”)
When the current instruction state flag is “0” and any of the winning numbers “00” to “14” is determined as the winning combination, any of the setting values “1” to “3” is set. If it is, “2/256” is won for acquiring the number of ART sets, and “254/256” is not selected for acquiring the number of ART sets. Also, if either the setting value “4” or the setting value “5” is set, “3/256” will win the number of ART sets, and “253/256” will win the number of ART sets. Will not be elected. When the set value “6” is set, “4/256” is won for acquiring the number of ART sets, and “252/256” is not selected for acquiring the number of ART sets.

(The current instruction status flag is “0” and the winning numbers are “20” to “29”)
When the current instruction state flag is “0” and any of the winning numbers “20” to “29” is determined as the winning combination, any of the setting values “1” to “6” is not won Is “256/256” and the winning is “0/256”, there is no case where the number of ART sets can be obtained.

(The current instruction status flag is “0” and the winning number is “16”)
When the current instruction state flag is “0” and the winning number “16” is determined as the winning combination, if any of the set value “1” to the set value “4” is set, “13 / “256” wins the number of ART sets, and “243/256” wins the number of ART sets. In addition, when either the setting value “5” or the setting value “6” is set, “26/256” wins the acquisition of the ART set number, and “230/256” acquires the ART set number. Will not be elected.

(The current instruction status flag is “0” and the winning number is “17”)
When the current instruction state flag is “0” and the winning number “17” is determined as the winning combination, when any of the set value “1” to the set value “4” is set, “39 / “256” wins the acquisition of the number of ART sets and “217/256” wins the acquisition of the number of ART sets. Also, when either the set value “5” or the set value “6” is set, “52/256” wins the acquisition of the ART set number, and “204/256” acquires the ART set number. Will not be elected.

(The current instruction status flag is “0” and the winning number is “18” or the winning number is “19”)
When the current instruction status flag is “0” and either the winning number “18” or the winning number “19” is determined as the winning combination, any of the setting values “1” to “6” “85/256” wins the number of ART sets and “171/256” wins the number of ART sets.

(The current instruction status flag is “1” and the winning numbers are “00” to “14”)
When the current instruction state flag is “1” and any of the winning numbers “00” to “14” is determined as the winning combination, any of the setting values “1” to “6” is “7”. "/ 256" wins the acquisition of ART sets, and "249/256" wins the acquisition of ART sets.

(Current instruction status flag is “1” and winning numbers “20” to “29”)
When the current instruction state flag is “1” and any of the winning numbers “20” to “29” is determined as a winning combination, any of the setting values “1” to “6” is not won Is “256/256” and the winning is “0/256”, there is no case where the number of ART sets can be obtained.

(The current instruction status flag is “1” and the winning number is “16”)
When the current instruction state flag is “1” and the winning number “16” is determined as the winning combination, if any of the set value “1” to the set value “4” is set, “39 / “256” wins the acquisition of the number of ART sets and “217/256” wins the acquisition of the number of ART sets. Also, when either the set value “5” or the set value “6” is set, “52/256” wins the acquisition of the ART set number, and “204/256” acquires the ART set number. Will not be elected.

(The current instruction status flag is “1” and the winning number is “17”)
When the current instruction state flag is “1” and the winning number “17” is determined as the winning combination, the number of ART sets is “85/256” in any of the setting values “1” to “6”. Will be won, and "171/256" will not win the number of ART sets.

(The current instruction status flag is “1” and the winning number is “18” or the winning number is “19”)
When the current instruction state flag is “1” and either the winning number “18” or the winning number “19” is determined as the winning combination, any of the setting values “1” to “6” “7/256” wins the number of ART sets, and “249/256” wins the number of ART sets.

(Instruction game lottery table “4”)
Next, the instruction game lottery table “4” will be described with reference to FIG. The instruction game lottery table “4” is provided in the main ROM 302, and the main CPU 301 performs a lottery to acquire the number of sets in the ART state based on the winning combination in the “first carryover state” (ART In order to obtain the number of sets in the ART state based on the winning combination in the “first carryover state during ART”.

  In the designated game lottery table “4”, when any of the winning numbers “00” to “14” is determined as the winning combination, the non-winning is “256/256” and the winning is “0/256”. Therefore, there is no case where the number of ART sets can be acquired. Also, if any of the winning numbers “20” to “29” is determined as a winning combination, the non-winning is “256/256” and the winning is “0/256”, so the number of ART sets is acquired. There is nothing you can do. If the winning number “16” is determined as the winning combination, “6/256” is won to acquire the number of ART sets, and “250/256” is not selected to acquire the number of ART sets. If the winning number “17” is determined as the winning combination, “13/256” is won to acquire the number of ART sets, and “243/256” is not selected to acquire the number of ART sets. When the winning number “15” is determined as the winning combination, the non-winning is “0/256” and the winning is “256/256”, so the number of ART sets can always be acquired. If either of the winning numbers “18” or “19” is determined as the winning combination, “26/256” is won to acquire the number of ART sets, and “230/256” is the number of ART sets. Unwinned for acquisition.

(Instruction game lottery table “5”)
Next, the instruction game lottery table “5” will be described with reference to FIG. The instruction game lottery table “5” is provided in the main ROM 302, and the main CPU 301 performs the ART state based on the winning combination in each game in the “normal BB state during ART (actual operation“ 2 ”)”. It is provided to perform a lottery to acquire the number of sets in.

  In the designated game lottery table “5”, if any of the winning numbers “00” to “14” is determined as the winning combination, “7/256” is won to acquire the number of ART sets, and “249/256”. Will not win the number of ART sets. Also, if any of the winning numbers “20” to “29” is determined as a winning combination, the non-winning is “256/256” and the winning is “0/256”, so the number of ART sets is acquired. There is nothing you can do. When the winning number “16” is determined as the winning combination, “64/256” is won to acquire the number of ART sets, and “192/256” is not won to acquire the number of ART sets. When the winning number “17” is determined as the winning combination, “90/256” is won to acquire the number of ART sets, and “166/256” is not won to acquire the number of ART sets. When the winning number “15” is determined as the winning combination, the non-winning is “0/256” and the winning is “256/256”, so the number of ART sets can always be acquired. If either of the winning number “18” or the winning number “19” is determined as the winning combination, “128/256” is won to acquire the number of ART sets, and “128/256” is the number of ART sets. Unwinned for acquisition.

(Instruction game lottery table “6”)
Next, the instruction game lottery table “6” will be described with reference to FIG. The instruction game lottery table “6” is provided in the main ROM 302, and is provided for the main CPU 301 to perform an ART level lottery based on a mode in the ART state to be described later when starting the ART state. It has been. The ART level determined by lottery is stored in the ART level storage area of the main RAM 303.

  First, the ART mode, which is a mode in the ART state, is provided with five types of modes: “mode A”, “mode B”, “mode C”, “mode D”, and “mode E”. The ART level is provided with four types of levels, “LV1”, “LV2”, “LV3”, and “LV4”. Here, “LV4” which is a high level in the relationship of “mode A” <“mode B” <“mode C” <“mode D” <“mode E” is a lottery value that is easy to select, In an instruction game lottery table “7” to be described later, the higher the level, the easier it is to “win”. Therefore, “mode A” <“mode B” <“mode C” <“mode D” <“ This mode is advantageous to the player because of the “mode E”.

  When “Mode A” is selected, “LV1” is determined by “241/256”, “LV2” is determined by “10/256”, “LV3” is determined by “4/256”, “ “LV4” is determined at 1/256 ”. When “Mode B” is selected, “LV1” is determined by “128/256”, “LV2” is determined by “102/256”, “LV3” is determined by “18/256”, “ "LV4" is determined at 8/256 ". Further, when “Mode C” is selected, “LV1” is determined by “64/256”, “LV2” is determined by “64/256”, “LV3” is determined by “64/256”, and “LV3” is determined by “64/256”. “LV4” is determined by 64/256 ”. When “Mode D” is selected, “LV1” is not determined, “LV2” is determined by “86/256”, “LV3” is determined by “86/256”, and “86/256” is determined. "LV4" is determined. In the “mode E”, “LV1” and “LV2” are not determined, “LV3” is determined by “86/256”, and “LV4” is determined by “170/256”.

(Instruction game lottery table “7”)
Next, the instruction game lottery table “7” will be described with reference to FIG. The instruction game lottery table “7” is provided in the main ROM 302, and the main CPU 301 performs “ART preparation state (instruction game“ 1 ”)”, “ART state (instruction game“ 2 ”)”, “ART It is provided to perform a lottery to acquire the number of sets in the ART state based on the current ART level and the winning combination in any of the “continuous effect state (continuous effect state)”.

(When ART level is “LV1”)
When the ART level is “LV1” and one of the winning numbers “00” to “14” is determined as a winning combination, “3/256” is won to acquire the number of ART sets, and “253/256” is won. Will not win the number of ART sets. In addition, if any of the winning numbers “20” to “29” is determined as a winning combination, “4/256” will win the number of ART sets, and “252/256” will win the number of ART sets. Will not be elected. When the winning number “16” is determined as the winning combination, “26/256” is won to acquire the number of ART sets, and “230/256” is not won to acquire the number of ART sets. If the winning number “17” is determined as the winning combination, “52/256” is won to acquire the number of ART sets, and “204/256” is not selected to acquire the number of ART sets. When the winning number “15” is determined as the winning combination, the non-winning is “0/256” and the winning is “256/256”, so the number of ART sets can always be acquired. If either of the winning number “18” or the winning number “19” is determined as the winning combination, “128/256” is won to acquire the number of ART sets, and “128/256” is the number of ART sets. Unwinned for acquisition.

(When ART level is “LV2”)
When the ART level is “LV2”, if any of the winning numbers “00” to “14” is determined as a winning combination, “4/256” is won to acquire the number of ART sets, and “252/256”. Will not win the number of ART sets. In addition, if any of the winning numbers “20” to “29” is determined as a winning combination, “8/256” will win the number of ART sets, and “248/256” will win the number of ART sets. Will not be elected. When the winning number “16” is determined as the winning combination, “52/256” is won to acquire the number of ART sets, and “204/256” is not won to acquire the number of ART sets. When the winning number “17” is determined as the winning combination, “85/256” is won to acquire the number of ART sets, and “171/256” is not won to acquire the number of ART sets. When the winning number “15” is determined as the winning combination, the non-winning is “0/256” and the winning is “256/256”, so the number of ART sets can always be acquired. If either of the winning number “18” or the winning number “19” is determined as the winning combination, “128/256” is won to acquire the number of ART sets, and “128/256” is the number of ART sets. Unwinned for acquisition.

(When ART level is “LV3”)
When the ART level is “LV3”, if any of winning numbers “00” to “14” is determined as a winning combination, “6/256” is won to acquire the number of ART sets, and “250/256” Will not win the number of ART sets. In addition, if any of the winning numbers “20” to “29” is determined as a winning combination, “12/256” will win the number of ART sets, and “244/256” will win the number of ART sets. Will not be elected. When the winning number “16” is determined as the winning combination, “85/256” is won to acquire the number of ART sets, and “171/256” is not won to acquire the number of ART sets. If the winning number “17” is determined as the winning combination, “128/256” is won to acquire the number of ART sets, and “128/256” is not won to acquire the number of ART sets. When the winning number “15” is determined as the winning combination, the non-winning is “0/256” and the winning is “256/256”, so the number of ART sets can always be acquired. If either of the winning number “18” or the winning number “19” is determined as the winning combination, “128/256” is won to acquire the number of ART sets, and “128/256” is the number of ART sets. Unwinned for acquisition.

(When ART level is “LV4”)
When the ART level is “LV4”, if any of the winning numbers “00” to “14” is determined as a winning combination, “11/256” is won to acquire the number of ART sets, and “245/256” Will not win the number of ART sets. In addition, if any of the winning numbers “20” to “29” is determined as a winning combination, “27/256” will win the number of ART sets, and “229/256” will win the number of ART sets. Will not be elected. If the winning number “16” is determined as the winning combination, “128/256” is won for acquiring the number of ART sets, and “128/256” is not winning for acquiring the number of ART sets. If the winning number “17” is determined as the winning combination, “128/256” is won to acquire the number of ART sets, and “128/256” is not won to acquire the number of ART sets. When the winning number “15” is determined as the winning combination, the non-winning is “0/256” and the winning is “256/256”, so the number of ART sets can always be acquired. If either of the winning number “18” or the winning number “19” is determined as the winning combination, “128/256” is won to acquire the number of ART sets, and “128/256” is the number of ART sets. Unwinned for acquisition.

(Instruction game lottery table “8”)
Next, the instruction game lottery table “8” will be described with reference to FIG. The instruction game lottery table “8” is provided in the main ROM 302, and when the main CPU 301 performs the initial setting of the ART state, it is based on the setting value set in the setting value changing process described later. Provided to determine the mode.

  First, when the set value is “1”, “Mode A” is determined by “102/256”, “Mode B” is determined by “90/256”, and “Mode C” is determined by “38/256”. , “Mode D” is determined by “21/256”, and “Mode E” is determined by “5/256”. Next, when the set value is “2”, “Mode A” is determined by “90/256”, “Mode B” is determined by “90/256”, and “Mode C” is determined by “52/256”. ”,“ Mode D ”is determined by“ 21/256 ”, and“ Mode E ”is determined by“ 3/256 ”. Next, when the set value is “3”, “Mode A” is determined by “102/256”, “Mode B” is determined by “90/256”, and “Mode C” is determined by “38/256”. ”,“ Mode D ”is determined by“ 21/256 ”, and“ Mode E ”is determined by“ 5/256 ”. Next, when the set value is “4”, “Mode A” is determined by “84/256”, “Mode B” is determined by “84/256”, and “Mode C” is determined by “64/256”. ”,“ Mode D ”is determined by“ 21/256 ”, and“ Mode E ”is determined by“ 3/256 ”. Next, when the set value is “5”, “Mode A” is determined by “89/256”, “Mode B” is determined by “89/256”, and “Mode C” is determined by “36/256”. ”,“ Mode D ”is determined by“ 36/256 ”, and“ Mode E ”is determined by“ 6/256 ”. Next, when the set value is “6”, “Mode A” is determined by “77/256”, “Mode B” is determined by “77/256”, and “Mode C” is determined by “77/256”. ”,“ Mode D ”is determined by“ 22/256 ”, and“ Mode E ”is determined by“ 3/256 ”.

(Instruction game lottery table “9”)
Next, the instruction game lottery table “9” will be described with reference to FIG. The instruction game lottery table “9” is provided in the main ROM 302. When the main CPU 301 is in the “second ART added state (instruction game“ 5 ”)”, the value of the instruction game “5” remaining game counter is “ It is provided to perform a lottery to acquire the number of sets in the ART state based on the winning combination until it becomes “0”. The “0” set indicates that the number of sets in the ART state was not won, and the “1” set, the “2” set, and the “3” set were “1” lotteries. It represents the number of sets in the ART state that can be acquired. Here, in the main RAM 303, an instruction game “5” remaining game counter is provided.

  In the designated game lottery table “9”, if any of the winning numbers “00” to “14” is determined as a winning combination, “204/256” is not won to acquire the number of ART sets, and “52/256” ”Will win the number of ART sets“ 1 ”. In addition, “2” set and “3” set will not be won. In addition, if any of the winning numbers “20” to “29” is determined as a winning combination, “128/256” is not won to acquire the number of ART sets, and “128/256” is the number of ART sets “ 1 ”Set wins. In addition, “2” set and “3” set will not be won. Also, if the winning number “16” is determined as the winning combination, “248/256” will win the number of ART sets “1”, and “7/256” will get the number of ART sets “2”. Will be won, and "1/256" will win the number of ART sets "3". There will be no win for the number of ART sets. Also, if the winning number “17” is determined as the winning combination, “243/256” will win the number of ART sets “1”, and “11/256” will get the number of ART sets “2”. Will be won, and “2/256” will win the number of ART sets “3”. There will be no win for the number of ART sets. If the winning number “15” is determined as the winning combination, “86/256” will win the number of ART sets “1”, and “85/256” will get the number of ART sets “2”. Will be won, and “85/256” will win the number of ART sets “3”. There will be no win for the number of ART sets. If either winning number “18” or winning number “19” is determined as a winning combination, “230/256” will win the number of ART sets “1”, and “22/256” The number of ART sets is won to win “2” sets, and the number of ART sets is won to win “3” sets at “4/256”. There will be no win for the number of ART sets.

(Instruction game lottery table “10”)
Next, the instruction game lottery table “10” will be described with reference to FIG. The instruction game lottery table “10” is provided in the main ROM 302, and the main CPU 301 performs the “1” set in the “first ART added state (instruction game“ 4 ”)” in the “10” game, which will be described later. Based on the setting value set in the setting value change process and the winning combination, whether or not to continue the “first ART added state (instruction game“ 4 ”)”, that is, the current “1” set, “10 It is provided for performing a lottery on whether or not to shift to the next “1” set and “10” game when the game is over. In addition, the lottery using the instruction game lottery table “10” is performed over every game of “1” set of “first ART added state (instruction game“ 4 ”)” and “10” games. However, if there is a remaining game (for example, if the “1” game is won), the remaining game (for example, between the remaining “9” games), the designated game lottery table Instead of a lottery using “10”, a lottery using an instruction game lottery table “13” which will be described later is performed. Note that “winning” in the designated game lottery table “10” indicates that the player has won the next “1” set and “10” game, and “non-winning” means to transfer. This means that you did not win.

(When the set value is “1”)
When the set value is “1”, if any of winning numbers “00” to “14” is determined as a winning combination, “6/256” is won and “250/256” is not won. . If any of the winning numbers “20” to “29” is determined as a winning combination, “78/256” is won and “178/256” is not won. When the winning number “16” is determined as the winning combination, “256/256” is won, and no winning is made. Further, when the winning number “17” is determined as the winning combination, “256/256” is won, and no winning is made. Further, when the winning number “15” is determined as the winning combination, “256/256” is won, and no winning is made. In addition, when either of the winning numbers “18” and “19” is determined as the winning combination, “256/256” is won, and no winning is made.

(When the setting value is “2”)
When the set value is “2”, if any of the winning numbers “00” to “14” is determined as the winning combination, “6/256” is won and “250/256” is not won. . If any of the winning numbers “20” to “29” is determined as a winning combination, “78/256” is won and “178/256” is not won. When the winning number “16” is determined as the winning combination, “256/256” is won, and no winning is made. Further, when the winning number “17” is determined as the winning combination, “256/256” is won, and no winning is made. Further, when the winning number “15” is determined as the winning combination, “256/256” is won, and no winning is made. In addition, when either of the winning numbers “18” and “19” is determined as the winning combination, “256/256” is won, and no winning is made.

(When the setting value is “3”)
When the set value is “3”, if any of the winning numbers “00” to “14” is determined as the winning combination, “6/256” is won and “250/256” is not won. . If any of the winning numbers “20” to “29” is determined as the winning combination, “77/256” is won and “179/256” is not won. When the winning number “16” is determined as the winning combination, “256/256” is won, and no winning is made. Further, when the winning number “17” is determined as the winning combination, “256/256” is won, and no winning is made. Further, when the winning number “15” is determined as the winning combination, “256/256” is won, and no winning is made. In addition, when either of the winning numbers “18” and “19” is determined as the winning combination, “256/256” is won, and no winning is made.

(When the set value is “4”)
When the set value is “4”, if any of the winning numbers “00” to “14” is determined as the winning combination, “6/256” is won and “250/256” is not won. . If any of the winning numbers “20” to “29” is determined as the winning combination, “77/256” is won and “179/256” is not won. When the winning number “16” is determined as the winning combination, “256/256” is won, and no winning is made. Further, when the winning number “17” is determined as the winning combination, “256/256” is won, and no winning is made. Further, when the winning number “15” is determined as the winning combination, “256/256” is won, and no winning is made. In addition, when either of the winning numbers “18” and “19” is determined as the winning combination, “256/256” is won, and no winning is made.

(When the set value is “5”)
When the set value is “5”, if any of the winning numbers “00” to “14” is determined as the winning combination, “6/256” is won and “250/256” is not won. . If any of the winning numbers “20” to “29” is determined as a winning combination, “76/256” is won and “180/256” is not won. When the winning number “16” is determined as the winning combination, “256/256” is won, and no winning is made. Further, when the winning number “17” is determined as the winning combination, “256/256” is won, and no winning is made. Further, when the winning number “15” is determined as the winning combination, “256/256” is won, and no winning is made. In addition, when either of the winning numbers “18” and “19” is determined as the winning combination, “256/256” is won, and no winning is made.

(When the set value is “6”)
When the set value is “6”, if any of the winning numbers “00” to “14” is determined as a winning combination, “6/256” is won and “250/256” is not won. . If any of the winning numbers “20” to “29” is determined as a winning combination, “76/256” is won and “180/256” is not won. When the winning number “16” is determined as the winning combination, “256/256” is won, and no winning is made. Further, when the winning number “17” is determined as the winning combination, “256/256” is won, and no winning is made. Further, when the winning number “15” is determined as the winning combination, “256/256” is won, and no winning is made. In addition, when either of the winning numbers “18” and “19” is determined as the winning combination, “256/256” is won, and no winning is made.

(Instruction game lottery table “11”)
Next, the instruction game lottery table “11” will be described with reference to FIG. The instruction game lottery table “11” is provided in the main ROM 302, and the main CPU 301 performs the instruction game “5” remaining game counter based on the winning combination in the “infinite ART state (instruction game“ 3 ”)”. It is provided for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to add the values. Note that “0” indicates that the lottery of whether or not to add the value of the instruction game “5” remaining game counter is not won, and “1”, “3”, “5” "" Represents the value of the instruction game "5" remaining game counter to be added in "1" lottery.

  In the designated game lottery table “11”, when any of the winning numbers “00” to “14” is determined as the winning combination, “255/256” is not won, and “1/256” is the designated game “5”. “The winning game counter is won by adding“ 1 ”to the value of the remaining game counter. In addition, "3" pieces and "5" pieces will not be won. In addition, if any of the winning numbers “20” to “29” is determined as a winning combination, “255/256” is not won, and “1/256” is the value of the instruction game “5” remaining game counter. Winning by adding “1”. In addition, "3" pieces and "5" pieces will not be won. Also, if the winning number “16” is determined as the winning combination, “230/256” will result in non-winning, and “13/256” will add “1” to the value of the instruction game “5” remaining game counter. The winning game is won by adding “3” to the value of the remaining game counter of the designated game “5” at “13/256”. In addition, “5” will not be won. Also, when the winning number “17” is determined as the winning combination, “205/256” makes the non-winning and “32/256” adds “1” to the value of the instruction game “5” remaining game counter. The winning game is won by adding “3” to the value of the remaining game counter of the designated game “5” at “19/256”. In addition, “5” will not be won. When the winning number “15” is determined as the winning combination, “5” is added to the value of the remaining game counter of the designated game “5” in “256/256”. There will be no wins, and there will be no wins for “1” or “3”. If either of the winning number “18” or the winning number “19” is determined as the winning combination, “128/256” is not won, and “112/256” is the instruction game “5” remaining game counter. The winning is to add “1” to the value, and “3” is added to the value of the remaining game counter of the designated game “5” at “16/256”. In addition, “5” will not be won.

(Instruction game lottery table “12”)
Next, the instruction game lottery table “12” will be described with reference to FIG. The instruction game lottery table “12” is provided in the main ROM 302, and the main CPU 301 performs the instruction game “5” based on the winning combination in the “art BB state during ART (actual operation“ 3 ”)”. It is provided for performing a lottery on whether or not to add the value of the remaining game counter.

  In the designated game lottery table “12”, if any of the winning numbers “00” to “14” is determined as a winning combination, the winning combination is “192/256”, and the designated game “5” is designated “63/256”. “To win the value of“ 1 ”is added to the value of the remaining game counter, and to“ 3 ”to be added to the value of the“ 5 ”remaining game counter at“ 1/256 ”. In addition, “5” will not be won. If any of the winning numbers “20” to “29” is determined as the winning combination, the winning combination is “256/256”. In addition, “1”, “3”, and “5” are not won. If the winning number “16” is determined as the winning combination, “224/256” is added to the instruction game “5” and the remaining game counter value is incremented by “1”, and “32/256” is indicated. It is won by adding “3” to the value of the game “5” remaining game counter. There will be no wins and no “5” wins. In addition, when the winning number “17” is determined as the winning combination, “192/256” is added to the instruction game “5” remaining game counter value, “1” is added, and “64/256” is specified. It is won by adding “3” to the value of the game “5” remaining game counter. There will be no wins and no “5” wins. When the winning number “15” is determined as the winning combination, “5” is added to the value of the remaining game counter of the designated game “5” in “256/256”. There will be no wins, and there will be no wins for “1” or “3”. Also, if either the winning number “18” or the winning number “19” is determined as the winning combination, “1” is added to the instruction game “5” remaining game counter value by “128/256”. Thus, “128/256” is won by adding “3” to the value of the remaining game counter of the designated game “5”. There will be no wins and no “5” wins.

(Instruction game lottery table “13”)
Next, the instruction game lottery table “13” will be described with reference to FIG. The instruction game lottery table “13” is provided in the main ROM 302, and the “1” set in the “first ART added state (instruction game“ 4 ”)” and the “1” set in the “10” game are the next “1” set. When the lottery of whether or not to shift to the “10” game is won, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery of whether or not to add the value of the instruction game “5” remaining game counter based on the winning combination. It is provided for.

  In the designated game lottery table “13”, if any of the winning numbers “00” to “14” is determined as the winning combination, the winning combination is “256/256”. In addition, “1”, “3”, and “5” are not won. If any of the winning numbers “20” to “29” is determined as the winning combination, the winning combination is “256/256”. In addition, “1”, “3”, and “5” are not won. Also, if the winning number “16” is determined as the winning combination, “230/256” will result in non-winning, and “13/256” will add “1” to the value of the instruction game “5” remaining game counter. The winning game is won by adding “5” to the value of the remaining game counter of the designated game “5” at “13/256”. In addition, “3” will not be won. Also, if the winning number “17” is determined as the winning combination, “205/256” will result in non-winning, and “39/256” will add “1” to the value of the instruction game “5” remaining game counter. The winning game is won by adding “3” to the value of “5” remaining game counter in “9/256”, and the value of the “5” remaining game counter in “3/256” is set to “5”. Winning to win. When the winning number “15” is determined as the winning combination, “5” is added to the value of the remaining game counter of the designated game “5” in “256/256”. There will be no wins, and there will be no wins for “1” or “3”. If either of the winning number “18” or the winning number “19” is determined as the winning combination, “192/256” is not won, and “48/256” is the instruction game “5” remaining game counter. It is elected to add “1” to the value, “8” to win the instruction game “5”, and “3” to add the remaining game counter value to “8” to win the instruction game “5”. Winning is made by adding “5” to the value of the remaining game counter.

(Instruction game “4” transition lottery table)
Next, based on FIG. 26, an instruction game “4” transition lottery table will be described. The instruction game “4” transition lottery table is provided in the main ROM 302, and the main CPU 301 sets the setting value set in the setting value change process described later in the “ART state (instruction game“ 2 ”)”. Based on this, it is provided for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the “first ART added state (instruction game“ 4 ”)”.

  In the instruction game “4” transition lottery table, when the set value is “1”, when the set value is “2”, when the set value is “3”, when the set value is “4”, When the set value is “5”, when the set value is “6”, “1/256” is used to shift to the “first ART added state (instructed game“ 4 ”)”. Thus, “255/256” is not won to shift to the “first ART added state (instructed game“ 4 ”)”. Note that a lottery value may have a difference for each set value, and whether or not a win is determined may be determined based on the set value and a winning combination. In the present embodiment, even when the “normal BB state during ART (actual operation“ 2 ”)” is being performed, after the “normal BB state during ART (actual operation“ 2 ”)” ends. , A lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the “first ART added state (instructed game“ 4 ”)” is performed, but even when the lottery is performed, the instruction game “4” transition lottery table is used. Alternatively, a table for the accessory operation “2” of the instruction game “4” transition lottery table may be newly provided.

(Bonus seed lottery distribution table)
Next, the bonus type lottery distribution table will be described with reference to FIG. The bonus type lottery distribution table is provided in the main ROM 302, and “BB” is selected as the winning combination in the “ART preparation state (instruction game“ 1 ”)” and “ART state (instruction game“ 2 ”)”. When determined, the main CPU 301 is provided for performing a lottery to determine whether the selected “BB” is the accessory operation “2” or the accessory operation “3”.

  In the bonus type lottery distribution table, when the set value is “1”, “246/256” wins the accessory operation “2”, and “10/256” wins the accessory operation “3”. . When the set value is “2”, “246/256” wins the accessory operation “2”, and “10/256” wins the accessory operation “3”. When the set value is “3”, “244/256” wins the accessory operation “2”, and “12/256” wins the accessory operation “3”. When the set value is “4”, “244/256” wins the accessory operation “2”, and “12/256” wins the accessory operation “3”. When the set value is “5”, “242/256” wins the accessory operation “2”, and “14/256” wins the accessory operation “3”. When the set value is “6”, “242/256” wins the accessory operation “2”, and “14/256” wins the accessory operation “3”. Note that the lottery may be performed in consideration of the winning combination won in the game for performing the bonus type distribution lottery.

(Chance replay ceiling decision table)
Next, the chance replay ceiling determination table will be described with reference to FIG. The chance replay ceiling determination table is provided in the main ROM 302, and the “normal BB state (workpiece) in the winning combination counter lottery process after the setting value changing process described later and the bonus end time process described later are performed. In the winning combination counter lottery process at the end of “operation“ 1 ”)”, the main CPU 301 is provided for performing the lottery of the chance replay ceiling number in the “normal state”. In the chance replay ceiling determination table, it is determined which reference column is to be referred to, and the chance replay ceiling frequency set in the reference column is determined using a chance replay ceiling frequency determination table described later. In the “normal state”, when the chance replay is determined as the winning combination, “1” is subtracted from the set number of chance replay ceilings. When the chance replay ceiling count is “0”, when “BB” is won, the “special BB state” is passed and the “ART state” is entered. In the main RAM 303, a chance replay ceiling number counter is provided.

  In the chance replay ceiling determination table, random numbers are extracted from the random number range of “0” to “255”. For example, if the extracted random values are “0” to “75”, the reference field “5” is selected. ”(Probability of 76/256), and if the extracted random number value is“ 76 ”to“ 126 ”, the reference field“ 4 ”is referred to (probability of 51/256), and the extracted random value is“ 127 ”to“ 177 ”, refer to the reference column“ 3 ”(probability of 51/256), and if the extracted random number value is“ 178 ”to“ 203 ”, refer to the reference column“ 2 ”. (26/256 probability), if the extracted random value is “204” to “229”, the reference field “1” is referred to (26/256 probability), and the extracted random value is “230” to “229”. If it is “255”, reference column “0” is referred to (26/256 probability). Then, using the value in the reference column to be referred to, the chance replay ceiling frequency is determined from a chance replay ceiling frequency determination table described later.

(Chance replay ceiling frequency determination table)
Next, the chance replay ceiling frequency determination table will be described with reference to FIG. The chance replay ceiling number determination table is provided in the main ROM 302, and the “normal BB state (combination) of winning combination counter lottery processing after setting value change processing described later and bonus end processing described later are performed. In the winning combination counter lottery process at the end of the object operation “1”) ”, the main CPU 301 is provided to perform the lottery of the chance replay ceiling number in the“ normal state ”.

  In the chance replay ceiling number determination table, the value set in the reference column is set in the chance replay ceiling number counter as the chance replay ceiling number using the value in the reference column determined in the above-described chance replay ceiling determination table. Will do. For example, when the value of the reference field determined in the chance replay ceiling determination table is “0”, “0” is set in the chance replay ceiling number counter. When “0” is set in the chance replay ceiling number counter, if “BB” is won, the “special BB state” will be followed by the “ART state”, while the chance replay ceiling number is set. For example, if “5” is set in the counter, after “5” wins for chance replay, if “BB” is not won, the “special BB state” is not passed to “ART state”. Thus, it can be said that it is most advantageous for the player to determine the reference field “0” and set “0” in the chance replay ceiling number counter compared to other values.

  The chance replay ceiling number is set in the winning combination counter lottery process after the setting value changing process described later is performed. If the setting value changing process described later is performed, the chance replay ceiling number counter is set. Since “0” may be set in the game, after the game store is opened, it is possible to give the player a willingness to play. The number of chance replay ceilings is set in the winning combination counter lottery process at the end of a “normal BB state (actor operation“ 1 ”)” in the bonus end process described later. Since there is a possibility that “0” is set in the ceiling number counter, it is possible to prevent the game from being stopped immediately after the bonus ends.

  Next, when the value of the reference field determined in the chance replay ceiling determination table is “1”, “5” is set in the chance replay ceiling number counter. When the value of the reference field determined in the chance replay ceiling determination table is “2”, “10” is set in the chance replay ceiling number counter. When the value of the reference field determined in the chance replay ceiling determination table is “3”, “25” is set in the chance replay ceiling number counter. When the value of the reference field determined in the chance replay ceiling determination table is “4”, “50” is set in the chance replay ceiling number counter. When the value of the reference field determined in the chance replay ceiling determination table is “5”, “75” is set in the chance replay ceiling number counter. That is, the chance replay ceiling count “0” is selected with the probability of “26/256”, the chance replay ceiling count “5” is selected with the probability of “26/256”, and the probability of “26/256”. The chance replay ceiling count “10” is selected, the chance replay ceiling count “25” is selected with a probability of “51/256”, and the chance replay ceiling count “50” is selected with a probability of “51/256”. The chance replay ceiling count “75” is selected with a probability of “76/256”.

(Instruction search table)
Next, the instruction retrieval table will be described with reference to FIG. The instruction search table is provided in the main ROM 302, and an instruction search table corresponding to each game type is determined. Here, when the current game type is any one of “1”, “2”, and “1” in the inside, the main CPU 301 refers to the instruction search table “1”. In addition, the current game type is “2” in the inside, the accessory operation “1”, the accessory operation “2”, the accessory operation “3”, the instruction game “1”, the instruction game “2”, and the instruction game “3”. ”, The instruction game“ 4 ”, or the instruction game“ 5 ”, the main CPU 301 refers to the instruction search table“ 2 ”. The contents determined with reference to each instruction retrieval table will be described later with reference to FIG. In the main RAM 303, a game type storage area for storing the current game type is provided.

(Instruction search table “1” and instruction search table “2”)
Next, the details of the instruction search table “1” and the instruction search table “2” will be described with reference to FIG. The instruction search table “1” and the instruction search table “2” are provided in the main ROM 302. The numbers shown in the instruction search table “2” correspond to the stop buttons, “1” indicates the left stop button 11, “2” indicates the middle stop button 12, and “3” indicates the right stop button 13. ing. For example, if “123” is defined, it indicates that the stop button is stopped in the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. In addition, when only “2” is specified, it indicates that if the middle stop button 12 is operated first, the subsequent operation order does not matter. When only “3” is specified, If the right stop button 13 is operated first, it indicates that the subsequent operation order does not matter. “No instruction” indicates that the operation order is not defined.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the main control board 300 uses the payout number display 16 managed via the status board 100 to have a timing different from the timing for displaying the payout number of medals (for example, the start lever 10 is operated). At any timing until the operation of each stop button is validated), information related to the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process described later may be displayed. Note that the information related to the winning combination corresponds to, for example, the operation order of the stop button when winning the “push order replay” and the operation order of the stop button when winning the “push order bell”. In addition, a bonus type corresponding to whether “BB01”, “BB02”, “BB03”, or “RB” is won. Note that, based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process described later, the instruction content determined for the winning combination is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 400 as an instruction information command. In the sub control board 400 that has received the instruction information command, information related to the winning combination may be displayed using the liquid crystal display device 31 via the effect control board 500.

  In the instruction search table “1” to be referred to when the current game type is any one of “1”, “2”, and “1” in the inside, the winning numbers “00” to “29” "No instruction" is determined as the instruction content, regardless of which winning combination is determined. Also, an instruction information command “no instruction” is transmitted from the main control board 300 as an instruction information command to be transmitted to the sub control board 400. As a result, when the current game type is one of “1”, “2”, or “1” in the inside, any winning combination from the winning number “00” to the winning number “29” is determined. In this case, for example, the information relating to the winning combination is not displayed on the payout number display 16 at any timing after the start lever 10 is operated until the operation of each stop button is validated. Similarly, when the current game type is normal “1”, normal “2”, or “1” in the inside, any winning combination from the winning number “00” to the winning number “29” If determined, for example, information relating to the winning combination is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31 at any timing after the start lever 10 is operated until the operation of each stop button is validated. .

  On the other hand, the current game type is “2” in the inside, the accessory operation “1”, the accessory operation “2”, the accessory operation “3”, the instruction game “1”, the instruction game “2”, and the instruction game “ In the instruction retrieval table “2” to be referred to when any of “3”, the instruction game “4”, and the instruction game “5”, “push order replay” of the winning numbers “05” to “14”, In the “push order bell” of the winning numbers “20” to “29”, the operation order constituting the information relating to the winning combination is displayed on the payout number display 16 and the liquid crystal display device 31. Therefore, when the replay “1” during RT3 of the winning number “05” is determined as the winning combination, “123” is determined as the instruction content, and operation order information “123” is transmitted as the instruction information command. Thus, for example, the payout number display 16 displays the operation order information “12” of “123”, and the liquid crystal display device 31 displays the operation order information “123”. Become. Then, the player who has confirmed such operation sequence information grasps that the left stop button 11 is operated first, the middle stop button 12 is operated next, and the right stop button 13 is operated last. be able to. When the replay “2” in RT3 with the winning number “06” is determined as the winning combination, “132” is determined as the instruction content, and operation order information “132” is transmitted as the instruction information command. When the replay “3” in RT3 with the winning number “07” is determined as the winning combination, “213” is determined as the instruction content, and operation order information “213” is transmitted as the instruction information command. When the replay “4” during RT3 with the winning number “08” is determined as the winning combination, “231” is determined as the instruction content, and operation order information “231” is transmitted as the instruction information command. Further, when the RT3 replay “5” of the winning number “09” is determined as the winning combination, “3” is determined as the instruction content, and operation order information “3” is transmitted as the instruction information command. Further, when the RT4 replay “1” with the winning number “10” is determined as the winning combination, “123” is determined as the instruction content, and operation order information “123” is transmitted as the instruction information command. Further, when the RT4 replay “2” with the winning number “11” is determined as the winning combination, “132” is determined as the instruction content, and operation order information “132” is transmitted as the instruction information command. Further, when the RT4 replay “3” with the winning number “12” is determined as the winning combination, “2” is determined as the instruction content, and operation order information “2” is transmitted as the instruction information command. Further, when the RT4 replay “4” with the winning number “13” is determined as the winning combination, “312” is determined as the instruction content, and operation order information “312” is transmitted as the instruction information command. Further, when the RT4 replay “5” with the winning number “14” is determined as the winning combination, “321” is determined as the instruction content, and the operation order information “321” is transmitted as the instruction information command.

  When the push order bell “123A” of the winning number “20” is determined as the winning combination, “123” is determined as the instruction content, and operation order information “123” is transmitted as the instruction information command. When the push order bell “132A” of the winning number “21” is determined as the winning combination, “132” is determined as the instruction content, and operation order information “132” is transmitted as the instruction information command. When the pressing order bell “2A” of the winning number “22” is determined as the winning combination, “2” is determined as the instruction content, and operation order information “2” is transmitted as the instruction information command. When the pressing order bell “312A” of the winning number “23” is determined as the winning combination, “312” is determined as the instruction content, and operation order information “312” is transmitted as the instruction information command. When the push order bell “321A” of the winning number “24” is determined as the winning combination, “321” is determined as the instruction content, and operation order information “321” is transmitted as the instruction information command. When the push order bell “123B” of the winning number “25” is determined as the winning combination, “123” is determined as the instruction content, and operation order information “123” is transmitted as the instruction information command. When the push order bell “132B” of the winning number “26” is determined as the winning combination, “132” is determined as the instruction content, and operation order information “132” is transmitted as the instruction information command. When the pressing order bell “2B” of the winning number “27” is determined as the winning combination, “2” is determined as the instruction content, and operation order information “2” is transmitted as the instruction information command. When the push order bell “312B” of the winning number “28” is determined as the winning combination, “312” is determined as the instruction content, and operation order information “312” is transmitted as the instruction information command. When the push order bell “321B” of the winning number “29” is determined as the winning combination, “321” is determined as the instruction content, and operation order information “321” is transmitted as the instruction information command. When any one of the winning numbers “00” to “04” and the winning numbers “15” to “19” is determined as the winning combination, “no instruction” is determined as the instruction content, and the instruction The operation order information “no instruction” is transmitted as an information command.

  In the present embodiment, a command with the content of “no instruction” is transmitted as the instruction information command, but the instruction information command itself may not be transmitted. Moreover, you may use LED32 and the speaker 33 as an alerting | reporting means which alert | reports an operation order.

(Bonus instruction display data table)
Next, the bonus instruction display data table will be described with reference to FIG. The bonus instruction display data table is provided in the main ROM 302.

  Here, in the present embodiment, during the period from the game winning “BB” as the winning combination until after the “7” game (when the later-described performance state counter is less than “7”), the number of payouts is displayed. 16 and the bonus type are not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31, and after the “8” game from the game winning “BB” (when an effect state counter described later is “8”), The payout number display 16 and the liquid crystal display device 31 are configured to display the bonus type. For example, when “BB01” is determined as the winning combination, “40”, which is the instruction content corresponding to “BB01”, is displayed on the payout number display 16 after the “8” game from the game won for “BB01”. Then, on the liquid crystal display device 31, for example, the instruction content “Aim for the red BAR” is displayed. An instruction information command indicating the instruction content “40” is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub-control board 400 after the “8” game from the game winning “BB01”. Similarly, when “BB02” is determined as the winning combination, “50”, which is the instruction content corresponding to “BB02”, is displayed on the payout number display 16 after the “8” game from the game won for “BB02”. In the liquid crystal display device 31, for example, the instruction content “Aim at the blue BAR” is displayed. In addition, an instruction information command indicating the instruction content “50” is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub-control board 400 after the “8” game from the game winning “BB02”. Similarly, when “BB03” is determined as the winning combination, “60”, which is the instruction content corresponding to “BB03”, is displayed on the payout number display 16 after the “8” game from the game won for “BB03”. In the liquid crystal display device 31, for example, the instruction content “Aim for the yellow BAR” is displayed. In addition, an instruction information command indicating the instruction content “60” is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub-control board 400 after the “8” game from the game winning “BB03”. In “RB”, “70” which is an instruction content corresponding to “RB” is displayed on the payout number display 16 in the game won “RB”, and “RB” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31. An effect suggesting that is established is executed. In “RB”, an instruction information command indicating the instruction content “70” is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub-control board 400 in the game won for “RB”.

(Program start processing by the main control board 300)
Next, a program start process performed by the main control board 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The program start process is a process performed based on the fact that the power switch 201sw is turned on.

(Step S1)
In step S <b> 1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not power is interrupted. Specifically, when power is supplied to the gaming machine 1, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the gaming machine 1 is in a power interruption state, and when the power is not supplied to the gaming machine 1. In this case, a process for determining whether or not the gaming machine 1 is cut off by the backup power source is performed. If it is determined that the power is interrupted (step S1 = Yes), the process of step S1 is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the power is not interrupted (step S1 = No), the process proceeds to step S2.

(Step S2)
In step S2, the main CPU 301 performs an initial setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets a table address for setting the internal register of the gaming machine 1, and performs a process of setting the register address based on the table. Then, when the process of step S2 ends, the process proceeds to step S3.

(Step S3)
In step S3, the main CPU 301 performs a RAM checksum calculation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 calculates the checksum of the main RAM 303, and when the calculation is completed, performs processing for setting the checksum of the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S3 ends, the process proceeds to step S4.

(Step S4)
In step S4, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not the setting change key switch is ON. In the present embodiment, a setting change key switch (not shown) is rotated by a predetermined angle while a setting change key (not shown) is inserted into a setting change key hole (not shown). It becomes ON. Therefore, in step S4, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the setting change key (not shown) is rotated by a predetermined angle in a state where the setting change key (not shown) is inserted into the setting change key hole (not shown). Do. When it is determined that the setting change key switch is ON (step S4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S5, and when it is determined that the setting change key switch is OFF (step S4). = No), the processing shifts to a power failure recovery process for restoring the value of the register saved before power interruption and the value of the saved stack pointer.

  When the power interruption recovery process is completed, the game machine 1 returns to the state when the power is turned off.

(Step S5)
In step S5, the main CPU 301 performs a setting value change process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 acquires the current set value, determines whether the range of the set value is normal, and if the determination result is normal, the stored number indicator 15, A process of displaying the current set value on a setting display section (not shown) is performed. On the other hand, when the above determination result is not normal, processing for setting the initial setting value of the setting value in the setting value storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. The main CPU 301 performs setting value switching processing based on the detection of the operation of the setting change button (not shown) by the setting change switch (not shown), and the start lever 10 by the start switch 10sw. On the basis of the detected operation, the setting value is determined, and based on the detection that the setting change key that has been rotated by a predetermined angle has been rotated to an angle at which it can be inserted and removed. Then, a process for storing the set value in a set value storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S5 ends, the process proceeds to step S6.

(Step S6)
In step S <b> 6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the instruction game lottery table “1”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 reads out the instruction game lottery table “1” stored in the main ROM 302 and sets it in the register. Then, when the process of step S6 ends, the process proceeds to step S7.

(Step S7)
In step S7, the main CPU 301 performs a hard random number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for extracting the random number value generated by the main random number generator 304 and processing for storing the extracted random number value in a register. Then, when the process of step S7 ends, the process proceeds to step S8.

(Step S8)
In step S <b> 8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the number of lotteries “2”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “2”, which is the number of lotteries determined in the designated game lottery table “1”, in the register. Then, when the process of step S8 ends, the process proceeds to step S9.

(Step S9)
In step S9, the main CPU 301 performs a range lottery process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining a reference column of the instruction game lottery table “1” based on the instruction game lottery table “1” and the extracted random number value. Then, when the process of step S9 ends, the process proceeds to step S10.

(Step S10)
In step S10, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an instruction state flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of storing an instruction state flag in the instruction state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 based on the reference field determined in the range lottery process in step S9. For example, when the reference field “0” is determined, “0” is stored in the instruction state flag storage area as the instruction state flag, and when the reference field “1” is determined, “1” is stored as the instruction state flag. Is stored in the instruction state flag storage area, and when the reference field “2” is determined, “2” is stored in the instruction state flag storage area as the instruction state flag. Then, when the process of step S10 ends, the process proceeds to step S11.

(Step S11)
In step S11, the main CPU 301 performs a winning combination counter lottery process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 sets a chance replay ceiling determination table, determines a reference field of the chance replay ceiling frequency determination table based on the chance replay ceiling determination table and the extracted random number value, and enters the reference field. A process of setting the corresponding chance replay ceiling frequency in a chance replay ceiling frequency counter provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S11 ends, the process proceeds to the main loop process (see FIG. 36).

(Range lottery processing by the main control board 300)
Next, the range lottery process performed by the main control board 300 will be described based on FIG. Since the range lottery process is a process that shifts from various processes, the reference numerals will be described using step S9 used in the range lottery process of the program start process for convenience.

(Step S9-1)
In step S9-1, the main CPU 301 performs arithmetic processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs an operation using the extracted random number value and the value corresponding to the reference column of the set table. For example, when the instruction game lottery table “1” is set, first, an operation of subtracting the value “1” corresponding to the reference field “2” from the extracted random number value is performed. If the calculated value does not become a negative value, an operation of subtracting the value “76” corresponding to the reference field “1” from the extracted random value is performed, and the value calculated as a result of the operation is calculated. If is not a negative value, the reference field “0” is determined. For example, if the extracted random number value is “255”, “255” and the value “1” corresponding to the reference field “2” are not negative values, but “255” and the reference field “1”. Since the value “76” corresponding to “does not become a negative value, the reference field“ 0 ”is determined. On the other hand, for example, if the extracted random number value is “0”, “0” and the value “1” corresponding to the reference field “2” are negative values. Will be decided. Then, when the process of step S9-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S9-2.

(Step S9-2)
In step S9-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value is a negative value. Specifically, in step S9-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a negative value as a result of performing an operation using the extracted random number value and a value corresponding to the reference field. Do. If it is determined to be a negative value (step S9-2 = Yes), the range lottery process subroutine is terminated, and the process returns to the source process at the time of shifting to the range lottery process. If it is determined that the value is not a value (step S9-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S9-3.

(Step S9-3)
In step S9-3, the main CPU 301 performs a reference column switching process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of switching to a reference field different from the reference field currently referenced. For example, if the instruction game lottery table “1” is set and the currently referred reference column is “2”, a process of switching to the reference column “1” is performed. Then, when the process of step S9-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S9-4.

(Step S9-4)
In step S9-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting the number of lotteries. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the number of lotteries set in the transfer source process before shifting to the range lottery process. For example, if the program start process is shifted from step S9 to the range lottery process, the number of lotteries “2” set in step S8 is a subtraction target. Then, when the process of step S9-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S9-5.

(Step S9-5)
In step S9-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of lotteries is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value after the subtraction is “0” as a result of subtracting the number of lotteries in step S9-4. If it is determined that the number of lotteries is “0” (step S9-5 = Yes), the range lottery process subroutine is terminated, and the process returns to the transfer source process when the range lottery process is started. If it is determined that the number of lotteries is not “0” (step S9-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S9-1.

(Prize winning counter lottery process by the main control board 300)
Next, a winning combination counter lottery process performed by the main control board 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The winning combination counter is a chance replay ceiling number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Further, since the winning combination counter lottery process is a process that shifts from various processes, the reference numerals will be described using step S11 used in the winning combination counter lottery process of the program start process for convenience.

(Step S11-1)
In step S11-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a chance replay ceiling determination table. Specifically, the main CPU 301 reads out the chance replay ceiling determination table stored in the main ROM 302 and performs processing for setting it in the register. Then, when the process of step S11-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S11-2.

(Step S11-2)
In step S11-2, the main CPU 301 performs a hard random number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for extracting the random number value generated by the main random number generator 304 and processing for storing the extracted random number value in a register. Then, when the process of step S11-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S11-3.

(Step S11-3)
In step S11-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the number of lotteries “5”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “5”, which is the number of lotteries determined in the chance replay ceiling determination table, in the register. Then, when the process of step S11-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S11-4.

(Step S11-4)
In step S11-4, the main CPU 301 performs the range lottery process described in FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining a reference field of the chance replay ceiling determination table based on the chance replay ceiling determination table and the extracted random number value. Then, when the process of step S11-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S11-5.

(Step S11-5)
In step S11-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a chance replay ceiling frequency determination table. Specifically, the main CPU 301 reads a chance replay ceiling number determination table stored in the main ROM 302 and performs a process of setting it in the register. Then, when the process of step S11-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S11-6.

(Step S11-6)
In step S11-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining the number of chance replay ceilings. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs the chance replay based on the reference column of the chance replay ceiling determination table determined in the range lottery process in step S11-4 and the chance replay ceiling frequency determination table set in step S11-5. Processing to determine the number of ceilings is performed. For example, when the reference field of the chance replay ceiling determination table determined in the range lottery process in step S11-4 is “5”, “75” corresponding to the reference field “5” of the chance replay ceiling frequency determination table is a chance replay. Determine as the number of ceilings. In this case, if the chance replay is won “75” times, the chance replay ceiling is reached. Then, when the process of step S11-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S11-7.

(Step S11-7)
In step S11-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the chance replay ceiling count. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the chance replay ceiling frequency determined in step S11-6 in a chance replay ceiling frequency counter provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S11-7 is completed, the winning combination counter lottery processing subroutine is terminated, and the process returns to the original process when the winning combination counter lottery process is started.

(Main loop processing by the main control board 300)
Next, the main loop process performed by the main control board 300 will be described with reference to FIG.

(Step S101)
In step S101, the main CPU 301 performs an initialization process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the stack pointer, sets the initialization start address and the initialization end address of the main RAM 303, and then initializes from the initialization start address to the initialization end address area of the main RAM 303. Processing for initializing the area is performed. Further, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 and the value of the press reference position storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S101 ends, the process proceeds to step S102.

(Step S102)
In step S102, the main CPU 301 performs a game start management process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process for setting the main chip ID, a process for collectively transmitting the subcommand “1”, a medal acceptance start process, and the like. Then, when the process of step S102 ends, the process proceeds to step S103.

(Step S103)
In step S103, the main CPU 301 performs medal management processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not a medal has been inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 when a later-described re-game operation flag is not ON, and when the medal has been inserted into the medal insertion slot 6. In addition, the process of adding the value of the inserted number counter provided in the main RAM 303, the operation of the BET lever 7 and the MAXBET button 8 are detected, and the operation of the BET lever 7 and the MAXBET button 8 is determined. Is detected, the process of adding the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Further, it is determined whether or not an operation of the settlement button 9 is detected, and when an operation of the settlement button 9 is detected, a process of returning the stored medal to the player is performed. Then, when the process of step S103 ends, the process proceeds to step S104.

(Step S104)
In step S <b> 104, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the insertion number counter is “3”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the value of the inserted number counter provided in the main RAM 303 to “3” by the medal acceptance start process performed as a subroutine of the game start management process in step S102 and the medal management process in step S103. Is performed to determine whether or not. If it is determined that the value of the inserted number counter is “3” (step S104 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S105, where it is determined that the value of the inserted number counter is not “3”. In this case (step S104 = No), the process proceeds to step S103.

(Step S105)
In step S105, the main CPU 301 performs a start lever check process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not an operation of the start lever is detected by the start switch 10sw, and is provided in the main RAM 303 when the operation of the start lever 10 is detected by the start switch 10sw. Processing for turning off the re-game operating flag in the re-game operating flag storage area is performed. On the other hand, when the operation of the start lever 10 is not detected by the start switch 10sw, the start lever check process is terminated. Then, when the process of step S105 ends, the process proceeds to step S106.

(Step S106)
In step S106, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the start switch is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the start switch 10sw is ON by the start lever check process in step S105. When it is determined that the start switch is ON (step S106 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S107. When it is determined that the start switch is not ON (step S106 = No), The process proceeds to step S103.

(Step S107)
In step S107, the main CPU 301 performs an internal lottery process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining a winning combination by lottery. Then, when the process of step S107 ends, the process proceeds to step S108.

(Step S108)
In step S108, the main CPU 301 performs a bonus information update process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of updating the carry flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 when one of “BB01” to “BB03” is won by the internal lottery process in step S107. And performing processing for setting information relating to the “fifth RT gaming state” in the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. On the other hand, if any of “BB01” to “BB03” is not won by the internal lottery process in step S107, the value stored in the carry flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and the main RAM 303 The exclusive OR operation is performed on the value of the winning combination storage area provided in, and the result of the calculation is stored in the winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S108 ends, the process proceeds to step S109.

(Step S109)
In step S109, the main CPU 301 performs information setting processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 sets a process for updating the RT game state and game type when the bonus is won, a process for updating the RT game state when the RB is won, and a condition device command. Processing, setting a reel rotation start acceptance command, instruction game display management processing, fall waiting state processing, sub-command “2” batch transmission processing, and the like. Then, when the process of step S109 ends, the process proceeds to step S110.

(Step S110)
In step S110, the main CPU 301 performs reel rotation start preparation processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed. If it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed as a result of the determination, the main CPU 301 performs the minimum game in the next game. In order to determine whether or not the time has elapsed, a process of setting a value of a timer counter provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the minimum game time has not elapsed, the main CPU 301 performs a process of waiting until the minimum game time has elapsed. In addition, the main CPU 301 transmits the reel rotation start command having information indicating that the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is started to the sub control board 400. Is set in an effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110 ends, the process proceeds to step S111.

(Step S111)
In step S111, the main CPU 301 performs a reel rotation start process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 drives the left stepping motor 151, the middle stepping motor 152, and the right stepping motor 153 via the reel control board 150 to determine the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. Performs processing to rotate at high speed. Then, when the process of step S111 ends, the process proceeds to step S112.

(Step S112)
In step S112, the main CPU 301 performs processing during reel rotation. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, and right stop button 13 are pressed, and the left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, and right stop button 13 are pressed. In the case of pressing, among the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, the right reel 20 and the left stepping motor 151 corresponding to the operated stop button. Then, based on the values of the pulse counters supplied to the middle stepping motor 152 and the right stepping motor 153, the pressing reference position is acquired and stored in the pressing reference position storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Next, the main CPU 301 has a stop table (not shown) provided in the main ROM 302, the value of the winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303, the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop. Based on the operation order of the button 13, etc., a process of determining the number of sliding frames within the range of “0” to “4” frames is performed, and the determined number of sliding frames is determined as a sliding frame provided in the main RAM 303. Processing to store in the number storage area. The main CPU 301 rotates based on the value stored in the pressing reference position storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and the value stored in the sliding frame number storage area provided in the main RAM 303. A process of stopping the middle left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is performed. Then, when the process of step S112 ends, the process proceeds to step S113.

(Step S113)
In step S113, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not all reels have stopped. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are all stopped by the reel rotation process in step S112. If it is determined that all the reels are stopped (step S113 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S114. If it is determined that all the reels are not stopped (step S113 = No), The process proceeds to step S112, and the same process is repeated until all reels stop.

(Step S114)
In step S114, the main CPU 301 performs display determination processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 first sends the display determination command to the main RAM 303 in order to transmit a display determination command having information on the combination of symbols displayed on the effective line to the sub-control board 400. Is set in the production transmission data storage area. Next, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “a combination of symbols related to winning” is displayed on the active line, and determines that “a combination of symbols related to winning” is displayed on the active line. In the case of a game, a process for calculating the number of medals to be paid out to the player is performed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the “combination of symbols related to winning” is not displayed on the active line, a process is performed to determine whether or not the “combination of symbols related to replay” is displayed on the active line. When it is determined that the “combination of symbols related to replay” is displayed on the active line, a process of turning on the value of the re-game operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S114 ends, the process proceeds to step S115.

(Step S115)
In step S115, the main CPU 301 performs medal payout processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of paying out medals by driving the hopper 202 via the power supply board 200 based on the fact that “combination of symbols related to winning” is displayed on the active line. Do. Then, when the process of step S115 ends, the process proceeds to step S116.

(Step S116)
In step S116, the main CPU 301 performs a game state transition process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the process, the main CPU 301 performs a process for shifting the game state, a process according to the current game type, an instruction game state management process, and the like based on the combination of symbols displayed on the active line. Then, when the process of step S116 ends, the process proceeds to step S101.

(Game start management process)
Next, based on FIG. 37, the game start management process performed by the process of step S102 of FIG. 36 will be described. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a subroutine of game start management processing.

(Step S102-1)
In step S102-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a main chip ID command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 transmits the main chip ID command to the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the unique ID information determined by the main CPU 301 to the sub-control board 400. Perform the setting process. The main chip ID command set in the effect transmission data storage area is transmitted to the sub-control board 400 in a control command transmission process in an interrupt process described later. Then, in the sub control board 400, a process of checking with the main chip ID stored in advance in the sub control board 400 is performed. This makes it possible to check whether the main control board 300 has been replaced with an unauthorized board. Then, when the process of step S102-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S102-2.

(Step S102-2)
In step S102-2, the main CPU 301 performs a subcommand “1” batch transmission process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of collectively transmitting a plurality of commands grouped as the subcommand “1”. The subcommand “1” transmitted in this process includes (a) a game start command indicating that one game has started, (b) an RT game state type command indicating the type of RT game state, and the like. Is mentioned. Then, when the process of step S102-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S102-3.

(Step S102-3)
In step S102-3, the main CPU 301 performs medal acceptance start processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “3” to the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 when the re-game in-operation flag is ON. When the process of step S102-3 is completed, the game start management process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S103 of the main loop process.

(Internal lottery process)
Next, based on FIG. 38, the internal lottery process performed by the process of step S107 of FIG. 36 will be described. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the internal lottery process.

(Step S107-1)
In step S107-1, the main CPU 301 performs a hard random number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for extracting the random number value generated by the main random number generator 304 and processing for storing the extracted random number value in a register. Then, when the process of step S107-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S107-2.

(Step S107-2)
In step S107-2, the main CPU 301 performs a winning number initial value acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for obtaining an initial value of a winning number when determining a winning combination. Here, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 performs processing of acquiring “48” as the initial value of the winning number and storing it in the register. Then, when the process of step S107-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S107-3.

(Step S107-3)
In step S107-3, the main CPU 301 performs a gaming state acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a gaming state based on the value of the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S107-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S107-4.

(Step S107-4)
In step S107-4, the main CPU 301 performs a winning combination determination table setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a winning combination determination table provided in the main ROM 302 based on information related to the gaming state acquired in the gaming state acquisition process of step S107-3. Then, when the process of step S107-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S107-5.

(Step S107-5)
In step S107-5, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery data acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the winning combination corresponding to the winning number based on the winning combination determination table set by the winning combination determination table setting process in step S107-4 and the winning number stored in the register. The process which acquires the data concerned is performed. Then, when the process of step S107-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S107-6.

(Step S107-6)
In step S107-6, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery value acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the winning combination determination table currently set based on the value stored in the set value storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and the winning number stored in the register. A lottery value is acquired and stored in a register. Then, when the process of step S107-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S107-7.

(Step S107-7)
In step S107-7, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery confirmation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 subtracts the lottery value acquired by the lottery value acquisition process in step S107-6 from the random number value stored in the register, and subtracts the value of the register in which the random number value is stored. The process of updating to the value after storage and storing it is performed. Then, when the process of step S107-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S107-8.

(Step S107-8)
In step S107-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting the lottery value acquired by the lottery value acquisition process of step S107-6 from the random value stored in the register by the lottery confirmation process of step S107-7. Then, a process for determining whether or not the value is negative is performed. If it is determined that the winning combination is made (step S107-8 = Yes), the winning combination is determined based on the winning number stored in the register, and then the internal lottery processing subroutine is terminated, and the main loop processing is performed. The process proceeds to step S108. On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning is not made (step S107-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S107-9.

(Step S107-9)
In step S107-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the winning number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the winning number stored in the register. Then, when the process of step S107-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S107-10.

(Step S107-10)
In step S107-10, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the winning number is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the winning number is “0” as a result of subtracting “1” from the winning number value stored in the register by the process of step S107-9. Perform the process. If it is determined that the value of the winning number is “0” (step S107-10 = Yes), after determining “off” as the winning combination, the subroutine of the internal lottery process is terminated, and the main loop The process proceeds to step S108 of the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the winning number is not “0” (step S107-10 = No), the process proceeds to step S107-3.

(Information setting process)
Next, based on FIG. 39, the information setting process performed by the process of step S109 of FIG. 36 is demonstrated. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a subroutine of information setting processing.

(Step S109-1)
In step S109-1, the main CPU 301 performs a winning combination acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a value stored in a winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303 and setting the value in a register. Then, when the process of step S109-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-2.

(Step S109-2)
In step S109-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a bonus is won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the bonus is won based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303 acquired in step S109-1. Do. The bonus winning here refers to winning one of “BB01”, “BB02”, “BB03”, and “RB”. If it is determined that the bonus is won (step S109-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-3. If it is determined that the bonus is not won (step S109-2). = No), the process proceeds to step S109-11.

(Step S109-3)
In step S109-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the RB is won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not it is at the time of RB winning based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303 acquired in step S109-1. Do. If it is determined that the RB is won (step S109-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-10, and if it is determined that the RB is not selected (step S109-3). = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4.

(Step S109-4)
In step S109-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for changing the RT gaming state to the “fifth RT gaming state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of storing a value indicating the “fifth RT gaming state” in the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-5.

(Step S109-5)
In step S <b> 109-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a value indicating “1” in the inside to the register. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a value indicating “1” inside as a game type in a register. Then, when the process of step S109-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-6.

(Step S109-6)
In step S109-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a game type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 acquires a game type from a game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and performs a set process on the register. Then, when the process of step S109-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-7.

(Step S109-7)
In step S109-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether the game type is normally “1” or normal “2”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether the game type is normally “1” or normal “2” as a result of performing the process of acquiring the game type in step S109-6. Do. If it is determined that the game type is normally “1” or normal “2” (step S109-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-9, and the game type is normally “1”. Or, when it is determined that it is not normally “2” (step S109-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-8.

(Step S109-8)
In step S <b> 109-8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a value indicating “2” in the inside to the register. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a value indicating “2” in the interior as a game type in a register. Then, when the process of step S109-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-9.

(Step S109-9)
In step S109-9, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a register value in the game type storage area. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the value set in the register to the game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If “1” inside the set in step S109-5 is set, a process of setting “1” inside to the game type storage area is performed, and “inside” set in step S109-8 is set. If “2” is set, the process of setting “2” in the game type storage area is performed. Then, when the process of step S109-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-11.

(Step S109-10)
In step S109-10, the main CPU 301 performs processing for changing the RT gaming state to the “third RT gaming state during BB”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of storing a value indicating “the third RT gaming state during BB” in the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-11.

(Step S109-11)
In step S109-11, the main CPU 301 performs a stop control number setting process corresponding to the winning combination. Specifically, based on the winning combination acquired in step S109-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a stop control number for stopping the combination of symbols related to the winning combination on the active line. Then, when the process of step S109-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-12.

(Step S109-12)
In step S109-12, the main CPU 301 performs display permission symbol bit setting processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 displays a display permission symbol bit that is information related to a symbol combination that is allowed to be displayed on the active line based on the winning combination acquired by the winning combination acquisition process in step S109-1. Process to set. Then, when the process of step S109-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-13.

(Step S109-13)
In step S109-13, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a conditional device command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sends a conditional device command based on the value stored in the winning combination storage area acquired in step S109-1 to the conditional RAM command to the sub control board 400. Is set in the production transmission data storage area. Then, when the process of step S109-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-14.

(Step S109-14)
In step S109-14, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a reel rotation start acceptance command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the reel rotation start acceptance command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the reel rotation start acceptance command to the sub-control board 400. Perform the process. Here, the “reel rotation start acceptance command” is a command having information indicating that the operation of the start lever 10 has been accepted. Then, when the process of step S109-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-15.

(Step S109-15)
In step S109-15, the main CPU 301 performs an instruction game display management process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining an instruction type to be displayed on the payout number display 16 based on the value of the effect state counter added in the winning combination or the bonus internal intermediate process described later. The instruction type displayed on the payout number display 16 is the information related to the winning combination displayed on the payout number display 16 described in FIG. Then, when the process of step S109-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16.

(Step S109-16)
In step S109-16, the main CPU 301 performs an instruction game display management process “1-1” which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the process, the main CPU 301 performs a process according to the winning combination and the game type. Then, when the process of step S109-16 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-17.

(Step S109-17)
In step S109-17, the main CPU 301 performs a fall waiting state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process according to the game type and the RT game state. Then, when the process of step S109-17 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-18.

(Step S109-18)
In step S109-18, the main CPU 301 performs a sub-command “2” batch transmission process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of collectively transmitting a plurality of commands grouped as the subcommand “2”. The subcommand “2” transmitted in this process includes (a) a command indicating the value of the chance replay ceiling counter, (b) a command indicating the value of the instruction state flag, and (c) an ART state. A command indicating the value of the ART mode when staying in the game, (d) a command indicating the game type stored in the game type storage area, (e) an instruction game “4”, and an instruction game “5”. For example, a command indicating a counter value when the user is staying. When the process of step S109-18 ends, the information setting process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Instruction game display management process)
Next, based on FIG. 40, the instruction game display management process performed by the process of step S109-15 of FIG. 39 will be described. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a subroutine of instruction game display management processing.

(Step S109-15-1)
In step S109-15-1, the main CPU 301 performs a winning combination acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a value stored in a winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303 and setting the value in a register. Then, when the process of step S109-15-1 is completed, the process proceeds to step S109-15-2.

(Step S109-15-2)
In step S109-15-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning combination is lost. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the winning combination is lost based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303 acquired in step S109-15-1. Perform the process. If it is determined that the winning combination is out of place (step S109-15-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-15-9, and when it is determined that the winning combination is not out of position. (Step S109-15-2 = No), the process proceeds to Step S109-15-3.

(Step S109-15-3)
In step S109-15-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a general game during a bonus is being played. Specifically, the main CPU 301 refers to the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and performs a process of determining whether or not the current gaming state is the “second RT gaming state during BB”. The term “in general game during bonus” here means a state where “RB” is not won in any of the bonuses “BB01”, “BB02”, and “BB03”. In other words, when any of the bonuses “BB01”, “BB02”, and “BB03” is not won for “RB”, the instruction type corresponding to the winning combination in Step 109-15-8, which will be described later. The information relating to the winning combination is not displayed on the payout number display 16. If it is determined that the bonus game is in a general game (step S109-15-3 = Yes), the instruction game display management process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S109-16 in the information setting process. If it is determined that the game is not in a bonus game (step S109-15-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-15-4.

  If it is determined in step S109-15-3 that the bonus game is in a general game, the process proceeds to step S109-15-7, which will be described later, and steps S109-15-7 and S109-15-8. In this case, “no instruction” may be determined.

(Step S109-15-4)
In step S109-15-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for confirming the effect state counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for confirming an effect state counter provided in the main RAM 303. The effect state counter is a counter that is set and added in bonus internal middle processing described later, and is therefore a counter that counts the number of games when the game type is “1” inside or “2” inside. . Then, when the process of step S109-15-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-15-5.

(Step S109-15-5)
In step S <b> 109-15-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the effect state counter is less than “4”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not the effect state counter is less than “4” as a result of checking the effect state counter provided in the main RAM 303 in step S109-15-4. . If it is determined that the performance state counter is less than “4” (step S109-15-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-15-6, and the performance state counter is less than “4”. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S109-15-5 = No), the subroutine of the instruction game display management process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S109-16 of the information setting process.

(Step S109-15-6)
In step S109-15-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a game type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring a game type from a game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and setting it in a register. Then, when the process of step S109-15-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-15-7.

(Step S109-15-7)
In step S109-15-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an instruction retrieval table corresponding to the game type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an instruction search table to be referred to based on the game type acquired in step S109-15-6 and the instruction search table of FIG. For example, if the game type acquired in step S109-15-6 is “1” inside, the instruction retrieval table “1” is read from the main ROM 302, set in the register, and acquired in step S109-15-6. If the game type is “2” inside, the instruction retrieval table “2” is read from the main ROM 302 and set in the register. Then, when the process of step S109-15-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-15-8.

(Step S109-15-8)
In step S109-15-8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining an instruction type according to the winning combination. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines an instruction type corresponding to the winning combination based on the winning combination acquired in step S109-15-1 and the instruction search table set in step S109-15-7. I do. For example, when the instruction retrieval table “1” is set in the register and the winning combination is “normal replay”, “no instruction” is determined based on FIG. On the other hand, when the instruction retrieval table “2” is set in the register and the winning combination is “1” during RT3, “123” is determined based on FIG. Note that the instruction type (instruction content) determined in this process is transmitted as an instruction information command to the sub control board 400 in a control command transmission process in an interrupt process described later. As a result, for example, when an instruction information command corresponding to “no instruction” is transmitted, information on the winning combination (operation order) is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31, and the instruction information command corresponding to “123” is displayed. Is transmitted, information related to the winning combination (operation order “123”) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31. Further, the instruction type (instruction content) determined in the process is transmitted to the status board 100 as instruction information display LED data. As a result, for example, when the instruction type “123” is determined, “12” is transmitted to the status board 100 as the LED data for indicating information display, and the payout number display 16 displays information on the winning combination. (Operation order “12”) is displayed. If “no instruction” is determined as the instruction type, the instruction information display LED data is not created. When the process of step S109-15-8 is completed, the subroutine of the instruction game display management process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S109-16 of the information setting process.

  When an instruction type (instruction content) other than “no instruction” is determined in step S109-15-8, the determined instruction type (instruction content) and instruction information display LED data creation request flag are stored in the main RAM 303. Is stored. If it is determined in the interrupt processing described later that the instruction information display LED data creation request flag is stored in the main RAM 303, an instruction corresponding to the separately stored instruction type (instruction content) Information display LED data is created. For example, in the case where the instruction type (instruction content) corresponding to “123” is stored in the main RAM 303 together with the instruction information display LED data creation request flag, the instruction information “12” is indicated in the interrupt processing described later. Display LED data is created.

(Step S109-15-9)
In step S <b> 109-15-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not the RB is won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not it is at the time of RB winning based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303 acquired in step S109-15-1. Process. If it is determined that the RB is won (step S109-15-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-15-12, and if it is determined that the RB is not selected ( Step S109-15-9 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-15-10.

(Step S109-15-10)
In step S109-15-10, the main CPU 301 performs processing for confirming the effect state counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for confirming an effect state counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-15-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-15-11.

(Step S109-15-11)
In step S109-15-11, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the effect state counter is less than “7”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not the effect state counter is less than “7” as a result of confirming the effect state counter provided in the main RAM 303 in step S109-15-10. . If it is determined that the effect state counter is less than “7” (step S109-15-11 = Yes), the instruction game display management process subroutine is terminated, and the information setting process proceeds to step S109-16. When the process is shifted and it is determined that the effect state counter is not less than “7” (step S109-15-11 = No), the process shifts to step S109-15-12.

(Step S109-15-12)
In step S109-15-12, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a bonus instruction display data table. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of reading a “bonus instruction display data table” (see FIG. 32) from the main ROM 302 and setting it in a register. Then, when the process of step S109-15-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-15-13.

(Step S109-15-13)
In step S109-15-13, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining an instruction type corresponding to the winning bonus. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the winning combination acquired in step S109-15-1 and the carryover combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303 when the bonus is carried over, and step S109-15-12. On the basis of the bonus indication display data table set in, processing for determining an instruction type corresponding to the winning bonus type is performed. For example, when the bonus type stored in the winning combination or carryover combination storage area is “BB01”, “40” is determined based on FIG. 32, and when it is “BB02”, based on FIG. , “50” is determined, “60” is determined based on FIG. 32 when it is “BB03”, and “70” is determined based on FIG. 32 when it is “RB”. The instruction type (instruction content) determined in this process is transmitted as instruction information display LED data to the status board 100 and is transmitted to the sub-control board 400 as an instruction information command. As a result, for example, when the instruction information display LED data corresponding to “40” and the instruction information command are transmitted, the information related to the winning combination (the instruction content corresponding to the bonus type “BB01”) is displayed on the payout number display 16. "40") is displayed, and the liquid crystal display device 31 displays the instruction content "Aim for red BAR". When the process of step S109-15-13 is completed, the subroutine of the instruction game display management process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S109-16 of the information setting process.

(Instruction game state management process “1-1”)
Next, the instruction game state management process “1-1” performed by the process of step S109-16 of FIG. 39 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the instruction game state management process “1-1”.

(Step S109-16-1)
In step S109-16-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a game type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring a game type from a game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and setting it in a register. Then, when the process of step S109-16-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-2.

(Step S109-16-2)
In step S109-16-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether the game type is normally “1” or normal “2”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether the game type is normally “1” or normal “2” as a result of performing the process of acquiring the game type in step S109-16-1. Process. When it is determined that the game type is normally “1” or normal “2” (step S109-16-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-16-3, and the game type is When it is determined that it is not normally “1” or normal “2” (step S109-16-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-16-17.

(Step S109-16-3)
In step S109-16-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of “+1” the normal ceiling number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of “+1” a normal ceiling number counter provided in the main RAM 303. As will be described in detail later, when one of the “BB” is won when the normal ceiling number counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, the number of ART sets is set to “1”. Then, when the process of step S109-16-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-4.

(Step S109-16-4)
In step S109-16-4, the main CPU 301 performs a winning combination acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a value stored in a winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303 and setting the value in a register. Then, when the process of step S109-16-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-5.

(Step S109-16-5)
In step S109-16-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning combination is a chance replay. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the winning combination is a chance replay based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303 acquired in step S109-16-4. Processing to determine is performed. If it is determined that the winning combination is a chance replay (step S109-16-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-16-6, and it is determined that the winning combination is not a chance replay. In this case (step S109-16-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-16-7.

  In step S109-16-5, the winning combination is determined to be chance replay, for example, “BB01 + chance” of winning number “30” as well as “BB01 + chance of winning number” “Replay”, “BB02 + Chance Replay” with a winning number “36”, and “BB03 + Chance Replay” with a winning number “42”. Therefore, for example, when the chance replay ceiling number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “1”, “BB01 + chance replay” with a winning number “30”, “BB02 + chance replay” with a winning number “36”, winning When one of “BB03 + chance replay” with the number “42” is won, the chance replay winning counter is decremented to “0” and shifted to BB. In such a case, it is determined that the BB is won when the chance replay ceiling number counter is “0”, and the state shifts to the ART state after the BB ends. On the other hand, when the chance replay ceiling number counter is “1” and the “chance replay” of the winning number “02” is won, the chance replay ceiling number counter is subtracted to “0”. In a subsequent game, it is necessary to make BB win, and since it shifts to the ART state after the end of the BB, when the chance replay ceiling number counter is “1”, “BB01 + chance replay with the winning number“ 30 ” ”,“ BB02 + Chance Replay ”with a winning number“ 36 ”, and“ BB03 + Chance Replay ”with a winning number“ 42 ”, when the chance replay ceiling number counter is“ 1 ” Rather than winning the “02” “Chance Replay”, the game will proceed more efficiently.

(Step S109-16-6)
In step S109-16-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the number of chance replay ceilings. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from a chance replay ceiling number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-16-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-7.

(Step S109-16-7)
In step S109-16-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning combination is premium replay. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the winning combination is a premium replay based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303 acquired in step S109-16-4. Processing to determine is performed. If it is determined that the winning combination is a premium replay (step S109-16-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-16-8, and it is determined that the winning combination is not a premium replay. In this case (step S109-16-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-16-10.

(Step S109-16-8)
In step S109-16-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of incrementing the number of ART sets by “+1”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of “+1” the number of ART sets in the ART set number storage area provided in the main RAM 303. As a result, when premium replay is determined as the winning combination, it is determined to shift to the ART state. Note that the number of ART sets to be added in the processing can be arbitrarily changed. The main RAM 303 is provided with an ART set number storage area, and is configured to store up to “255” sets, for example. Then, when the process of step S109-16-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-9.

(Step S109-16-9)
In step S109-16-9, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the designated game “3” as the game type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the designated game “3” in the game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Thereby, when the premium replay is determined as the winning combination, the transition to the infinite ART state is confirmed. When the process of step S109-16-9 ends, the subroutine of the instruction game state management process “1-1” ends, and the process proceeds to step S109-17 of the information setting process.

(Step S109-16-10)
In step S109-16-10, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether the RT gaming state is the “third RT gaming state”, the “fourth RT gaming state”, or the “fifth RT gaming state”. . Specifically, the main CPU 301 refers to the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and the current RT gaming state is “third RT gaming state”, “fourth RT gaming state”, or “fifth RT gaming”. A process of determining whether the state is one of “state” is performed. When it is determined that the RT gaming state is one of the “third RT gaming state”, the “fourth RT gaming state”, or the “fifth RT gaming state” (step S109-16-10 = Yes). Then, the subroutine of the instruction game state management process “1-1” is ended, and the process proceeds to step S109-17 of the information setting process. The RT game state is “third RT game state” or “fourth RT game state”. Alternatively, if it is determined that the state is neither “fifth RT gaming state” (step S109-16-10 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-16-11.

(Step S109-16-11)
In step S109-16-11, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the instruction game lottery table “2”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of reading the instruction game lottery table “2” stored in the main ROM 302 and setting it in the register. Then, when the process of step S109-16-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-12.

(Step S109-16-12)
In step S109-16-12, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring an instruction state flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 refers to an instruction state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303, acquires the stored instruction state flag, and performs processing for setting it in a register. Then, when the process of step S109-16-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-13.

(Step S109-16-13)
In step S109-16-13, the main CPU 301 performs a hard random number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for extracting the random number value generated by the main random number generator 304 and processing for storing the extracted random number value in a register. Then, when the process of step S109-16-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-14.

(Step S109-16-14)
In step S109-16-14, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the number of lotteries “2”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “2”, which is the number of lotteries determined in the designated game lottery table “2”, in the register. Then, when the process of step S109-16-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-15.

(Step S109-16-15)
In step S109-16-15, the main CPU 301 performs the range lottery process described in detail with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining a reference column of the instruction game lottery table “2” based on the instruction game lottery table “2”, the extracted random number value, and the winning combination. Then, when the process of step S109-16-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-16.

(Step S109-16-16)
In step S109-16-16, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an instruction state flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of storing an instruction state flag in the instruction state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 based on the reference field determined in the range lottery process in step S109-16-15. When the process of step S109-16-16 ends, the subroutine of the instruction game state management process “1-1” ends, and the process proceeds to step S109-17 of the information setting process.

(Step S109-16-17)
In step S109-16-17, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether the game type is “1” inside or “2” inside. Specifically, as a result of performing the process of acquiring the game type in step S109-16-1, the main CPU 301 determines whether the game type is “1” inside or “2” inside. Processing to determine is performed. If it is determined that the game type is “1” inside or “2” inside (step S109-16-17 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-16-18, and the game When it is determined that the type is not “1” inside or “2” inside (step S109-16-17 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-16-19.

(Step S109-16-18)
In step S109-16-18, the main CPU 301 performs bonus internal / intermediate processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process for setting or adding an effect state counter, a process for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to add the number of ART sets when the effect state counter is less than “4”, and the like. When the process of step S109-16-18 is completed, the subroutine of the instruction game state management process “1-1” is ended, and the process proceeds to step S109-17 of the information setting process.

(Step S109-16-19)
In step S109-16-19, the main CPU 301 performs an instruction game state management process “1-2” which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing at the time of the accessory operation “1”, the accessory operation “2”, or the accessory operation “3”. When the process of step S109-16-19 ends, the subroutine of the instruction game state management process “1-1” ends, and the process proceeds to step S109-17 of the information setting process.

(Bonus internal processing)
Next, the bonus internal / intermediate process performed by the process of step S109-16-18 of FIG. 41 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a subroutine for bonus internal intermediate processing.

(Step S109-16-18-1)
In step S109-16-18-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for confirming the effect state counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for confirming an effect state counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-16-18-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-18-2.

(Step S109-16-18-2)
In step S <b> 109-16-18-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the effect state counter is “4” or more. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the effect state counter is “4” or more as a result of confirming the effect state counter provided in the main RAM 303 in step S109-16-18-1. I do. And when it determines with an effect state counter being "4" or more (step S109-16-18-2 = Yes), a process transfers to step S109-16-18-8, and an effect state counter is set. When it is determined that it is not “4” or more (step S109-16-18-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-16-18-3.

(Step S109-16-18-3)
In step S109-16-18-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the instruction game lottery table “4”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of reading the instruction game lottery table “4” stored in the main ROM 302 and setting it in the register. Then, when the process of step S109-16-18-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-18-4.

(Step S109-16-18-4)
In step S109-16-18-4, the main CPU 301 performs a hard random number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for extracting the random number value generated by the main random number generator 304 and processing for storing the extracted random number value in a register. Then, when the process of step S109-16-18-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-18-5.

(Step S109-16-18-5)
In step S109-16-18-5, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not to increase the number of ART sets by “+1” based on the designated game lottery table “4” and the winning combination stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. The lottery is performed. Therefore, in the bonus inside (“1” in the inside or “2” in the inside), when the performance state counter is less than “4”, the number of ART sets using the instruction game lottery table “4” is added. Although the lottery is performed, when the production state counter is “4” or more, the lottery for the number of ART sets using the instruction game lottery table “4” is not performed. Then, when the process of step S109-16-18-5 is completed, the process proceeds to step S109-16-18-6.

(Step S109-16-18-6)
In step S109-16-18-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is performed as a result of the lottery process in step S109-16-18-5. And when it determines with having won (step S109-16-18-6 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S109-16-18-7, and when it determines with having not been won ( The process proceeds to step S109-16-18-6 = No) and step S109-16-18-8.

(Step S109-16-18-7)
In step S109-16-18-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of incrementing the number of ART sets by “+1”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of “+1” the number of ART sets in the ART set number storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-16-18-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-18-8.

(Step S109-16-18-8)
In step S109-16-18-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the effect state counter is “8” or more. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the effect state counter is “8” or more as a result of confirming the effect state counter provided in the main RAM 303 in step S109-16-18-1. I do. If it is determined that the effect state counter is equal to or greater than “8” (step S109-16-18-8 = Yes), the bonus internal intermediate processing subroutine is terminated, and information setting processing step S109-17 is executed. If it is determined that the effect state counter is not equal to or greater than “8” (step S109-16-18-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-16-18-9.

(Step S109-16-18-9)
In step S109-16-18-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the effect state counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of “+1” an effect state counter provided in the main RAM 303. For example, in the game where “BB” is won, a process of setting an effect state counter is performed. When the process of step S109-16-18-9 ends, the bonus internal intermediate process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S109-17 of the information setting process.

(Instruction game state management process “1-2”)
Next, based on FIG. 43, the instruction game state management process “1-2” performed by the process of step S109-16-19 of FIG. 41 will be described. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a subroutine of instruction game state management processing “1-2”.

(Step S109-16-19-1)
In step S109-16-19-1, the main CPU 301 determines whether the game type is an accessory operation “1”, an accessory operation “2”, or an accessory operation “3”. Processing to determine is performed. Specifically, as a result of performing the process of acquiring the game type in step S109-16-1, the main CPU 301 determines that the game type is the accessory operation “1” or the accessory operation “2”. Or a combination act “3” is performed. If it is determined that the game type is an accessory operation “1”, an accessory operation “2”, or an accessory operation “3” (step S109-16-19-1 = Yes), step The process proceeds to S109-16-19-2, and when it is determined that the game type is not the accessory operation “1”, the accessory operation “2”, or the accessory operation “3” (step S109). -16-19-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23.

(Step S109-16-19-2)
In step S109-16-19-2, the main CPU 301 performs a winning combination acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a value stored in a winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303 and setting the value in a register. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-3.

(Step S109-16-19-3)
In step S109-16-19-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning combination is lost. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the winning combination is lost based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303 acquired in step S109-16-19-2. The process which determines is performed. If it is determined that the winning combination is lost (step S109-16-19-3 = Yes), the instruction game state management process “1-2” subroutine is terminated, and the information setting process step S109 is completed. The process proceeds to -17, and if it is determined that the winning combination is not out of place (step S109-16-19-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-4.

(Step S109-16-19-4)
In step S109-16-19-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is an accessory operation “3”. Specifically, in step S109-16-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is the accessory operation “3” as a result of performing the process of acquiring the game type. If it is determined that the game type is the accessory operation “3” (step S109-16-19-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-18, and the game type is If it is determined that the action is not “3” (step S109-16-19-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-5.

(Step S109-16-19-5)
In step S109-16-19-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the lottery management flag is set. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a lottery management flag is stored in a lottery management flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. The “lottery management flag” is a flag that is set in the lottery management flag storage area when “2” is set as the instruction state flag in the instruction state flag confirmation process of FIG. 44 described later. When the flag is set, a special lottery process for the number of ART sets is performed after the next game. If it is determined that the lottery management flag is set (step S109-16-19-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-6, and the lottery management flag is set. If it is determined that it is not (step S109-16-19-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-7.

(Step S109-16-19-6)
In step S109-16-19-6, the main CPU 301 performs an ART set number special lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery process for determining whether or not to further add the number of ART sets when the lottery management flag is stored. For example, the main CPU 301 extracts a random number value generated by the main random number generator 304 and refers to the instruction game lottery table “5” to perform a lottery process for determining whether or not to further add the number of ART sets. In performing the ART set number special lottery process, an ART set number special lottery table may be provided. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-11.

(Step S109-16-19-7)
In step S <b> 109-16-19-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the game type is an accessory operation “1”. Specifically, in step S109-16-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is the accessory operation “1” as a result of performing the process of acquiring the game type. If it is determined that the game type is an accessory operation “1” (step S109-16-19-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-8, and the game type is If it is determined that the action is not “1” (step S109-16-19-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-13.

(Step S109-16-19-8)
In step S109-16-19-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the instruction game lottery table “3”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 reads out the instruction game lottery table “3” stored in the main ROM 302 and sets it in a register. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-9.

(Step S109-16-19-9)
In step S109-16-19-9, the main CPU 301 performs an instruction state flag confirmation process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 acquires the instruction state flag, and if the instruction state flag is “2”, the main CPU 301 sets the winning flag or the lottery management flag, or the instruction state flag is not “2”. , Processing for acquiring a set value, a winning combination, and a random value. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-10.

(Step S109-16-19-10)
In step S109-16-19-10, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 includes an instruction game lottery table “3”, an instruction state flag value stored in an instruction state flag storage area provided in the main RAM, and a set value storage area provided in the main RAM. Whether to set the number of ART sets to “+1” based on the value of the set value stored in the winning combination, the winning combination stored in the winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and the extracted random number value I do. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-11.

  When the instruction state flag is “2”, the winning flag is set in the instruction state flag confirmation process of FIG. 44 described later. When the winning flag is set, the lottery result of “winning” is derived for the lottery of whether or not the number of ART sets is “+1” in the process of step S109-16-19-10. Thus, for example, in the normal state, when “2” is set as the instruction state flag, if “BB” is won, in the process during “BB” (in the process during the accessory operation “1”) ) Since the number of ART sets is always “+1”, the state shifts to the ART state after “BB” ends. It should be noted that the lottery management flag is set in the instruction state flag confirmation process of FIG. 44 described later in the next game transition of the game in which the lottery result with “winning” is derived and the number of ART sets is “+1”. Therefore, affirmative determination is made in step S109-16-19-5, and the ART set number special lottery process described in step S109-16-19-6 is executed.

(Step S109-16-19-11)
In step S109-16-19-11, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is performed as a result of the lottery process in step S109-16-19-10. And when it determines with having won (step S109-16-19-11 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S109-16-19-12, and when it determines with having not been won ( Step S109-16-19-11 = No), the instruction game state management process “1-2” subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to Step S109-17 of the information setting process.

(Step S109-16-19-12)
In step S109-16-19-12, the main CPU 301 performs a process of incrementing the number of ART sets by “+1”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of “+1” the number of ART sets in the ART set number storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S109-16-19-12 ends, the subroutine of the instruction game state management process “1-2” ends, and the process proceeds to step S109-17 of the information setting process.

(Step S109-16-19-13)
In step S109-16-19-13, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the instruction game lottery table “5”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of reading the instruction game lottery table “5” stored in the main ROM 302 and setting it in the register. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-14.

(Step S109-16-19-14)
In step S109-16-19-14, the main CPU 301 performs a hard random number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for extracting the random number value generated by the main random number generator 304 and processing for storing the extracted random number value in a register. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-15.

(Step S109-16-19-15)
In step S109-16-19-15, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the number of ART sets based on the designated game lottery table “5”, the winning combination stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303, and the extracted random number value. A lottery of whether or not to “+1” is performed. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-16.

  In addition, in the accessory operation “2”, in addition to the lottery process of step S109-16-19-15, the instruction game “4” transition lottery process using the instruction game “4” transition lottery table of FIG. Done. Then, in the instruction game “4” transition lottery process, when winning to transition to the instruction game “4” is won, the instruction game “4” which is a flag indicating the transition to the instruction game “4” in the main RAM 303. Set the transition flag to ON. As a result, after completion of the accessory operation “2”, the instruction game “4” is entered without returning to the instruction game “2”.

(Step S109-16-19-16)
In step S109-16-19-16, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is performed as a result of the lottery process in step S109-16-19-15. And when it determines with having won (step S109-16-19-16 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S109-16-19-17, and when it determines with having not been won ( Step S109-16-19-16 = No), the instruction game state management process “1-2” subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to Step S109-17 of the information setting process.

(Step S109-16-19-17)
In step S109-16-19-17, the main CPU 301 performs a process of incrementing the number of ART sets by “+1”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of “+1” the number of ART sets in the ART set number storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S109-16-19-17 ends, the subroutine of the instruction game state management process “1-2” ends, and the process proceeds to step S109-17 of the information setting process.

(Step S109-16-19-18)
In step S109-16-19-18, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the instruction game lottery table “12”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 reads out the instruction game lottery table “12” stored in the main ROM 302 and sets it in the register. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-18 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-19.

(Step S109-16-19-19)
In step S109-16-19-19, the main CPU 301 performs a hard random number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for extracting the random number value generated by the main random number generator 304 and processing for storing the extracted random number value in a register. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-19 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-20.

(Step S109-16-19-20)
In step S109-16-19-20, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the designated game “5” based on the designated game lottery table “12”, the winning combination stored in the winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and the extracted random number value. A lottery is performed to determine whether or not to add the remaining game counter value. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-20 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-21.

(Step S109-16-19-21)
In step S109-16-19-21, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won as a result of the lottery process in step S109-16-19-20. And when it determines with having won (step S109-16-19-21 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S109-16-19-22, and when it determines with having not been won ( Step S109-16-19-21 = No), the subroutine of the instruction game state management process “1-2” is ended, and the process proceeds to Step S109-17 of the information setting process.

(Step S109-16-19-22)
In step S109-16-19-22, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding the instruction game “5” remaining game counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding an instruction game “5” remaining game counter provided in the main RAM 303. Note that in the lottery using the instruction game lottery table “12”, “1”, “3”, or “5” can be obtained by one lottery, so the counter is added by the amount obtained. For example, if “5” is won, the counter is “+5”. When the process of step S109-16-19-22 is completed, the subroutine of the instruction game state management process “1-2” is ended, and the process proceeds to step S109-17 of the information setting process.

(Step S109-16-19-23)
In step S109-16-19-23, the main CPU 301 performs an instruction gaming state management process “1-3” which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the process, the main CPU 301 performs a process according to each instruction game, a process in the continuous effect state, and the like. When the process of step S109-16-19-23 ends, the subroutine of the instruction game state management process “1-2” ends, and the process proceeds to step S109-17 of the information setting process.

(Instruction status flag confirmation processing)
Next, based on FIG. 44, the instruction state flag confirmation process performed by the process of step S109-16-19-9 of FIG. 43 will be described. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a subroutine of instruction state flag confirmation processing.

(Step S109-16-19-9-1)
In step S109-16-19-9-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring an instruction state flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the stored instruction state flag from the instruction state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and setting it in the register. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-9-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-9-2.

(Step S109-16-19-9-2)
In step S <b> 109-16-19-9-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the instruction state flag is “2”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the instruction state flag acquired in step S109-16-19-9-1 is the instruction state flag “2”. If it is determined that the instruction state flag is “2” (step S109-16-19-9-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-9-3, and the instruction is performed. If it is determined that the status flag is not “2” (step S109-16-19-9-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-9-5.

(Step S109-16-19-9-3)
In step S109-16-19-9-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a winning flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a winning flag in a winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Note that by setting the winning flag, the lottery result of “winning” is derived in the lottery processing in step S109-16-19-10 of FIG. That is, the “winning flag” is a flag for setting the number of ART sets to “+1” when “BB” is won when the instruction state flag is “2”. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-9-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-9-4.

(Step S109-16-19-9-4)
In step S109-16-19-9-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a lottery management flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a lottery management flag in a lottery management flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. It should be noted that by setting the lottery management flag, affirmative determination is made in step S109-16-19-5 in FIG. 43 in the game subsequent to the game in which the lottery management flag is set, and thereafter, in FIG. The ART set number special lottery process of step S109-16-19-6 is executed. That is, the “lottery management flag” is a flag indicating that the number of ART sets has already been “+1” when “BB” is won when the instruction state flag is “2”. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-9-4 is completed, the subroutine of the instruction state flag confirmation process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-10 of the instruction game state management process “1-2”. To migrate.

(Step S109-16-19-9-5)
In step S109-16-19-9-5, the main CPU 301 performs a set value acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring a setting value stored in a setting value storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and setting it in a register. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-9-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-9-6.

(Step S109-16-19-9-6)
In step S109-16-19-9-6, the main CPU 301 performs a winning combination acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a value stored in a winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303 and setting the value in a register. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-9-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-9-7.

(Step S109-16-19-9-7)
In step S109-16-19-9-7, the main CPU 301 performs a hard random number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for extracting the random number value generated by the main random number generator 304 and processing for storing the extracted random number value in a register. When the process of step S109-16-19-9-7 is completed, the subroutine of the instruction state flag confirmation process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-10 of the instruction game state management process “1-2”. To migrate.

(Instruction game state management process “1-3”)
Next, based on FIG. 45, the instruction game state management process “1-3” performed by the process of step S109-16-19-23 of FIG. 43 will be described. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the instruction game state management process “1-3”.

(Step S109-16-19-23-1)
In step S109-16-19-23-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is the designated game “1”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is the designated game “1” as a result of performing the process of acquiring the game type in step S109-16-1. If it is determined that the game type is the designated game “1” (step S109-16-19-23-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-2. If it is determined that the game type is not the designated game “1” (step S109-16-19-23-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-3.

(Step S109-16-19-23-2)
In step S109-16-19-23-2, the main CPU 301 performs an instruction game “1” process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of lottering whether or not to add the number of ART sets, or a process of lottering whether or not to make an accessory operation “3” if a bonus is won. When the process of step S109-16-19-23-2 is completed, the subroutine of the instruction gaming state management process “1-3” is ended, and the process proceeds to step S109-17 of the information setting process.

(Step S109-16-19-23-3)
In step S109-16-19-23-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is the designated game “2”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is the designated game “2” as a result of performing the process of acquiring the game type in step S109-16-1. If it is determined that the game type is the designated game “2” (step S109-16-19-23-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-4. When it is determined that the game type is not the designated game “2” (step S109-16-19-23-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-5.

(Step S109-16-19-23-4)
In step S109-16-19-23-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process during the instruction game “2” which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 draws a lottery to determine whether or not to perform the accessory operation “3” when the bonus is won, or when the remaining ART set number is “1”, Process for drawing whether or not to add, or when the number of remaining ART sets is not “1” (when there is “1” or more), special lottery processing for the number of ART sets, or transition to instruction game “4” Perform lottery processing. When the process of step S109-16-19-23-4 is completed, the subroutine of the instructed gaming state management process “1-3” is ended, and the process proceeds to step S109-17 of the information setting process.

(Step S109-16-19-23-5)
In step S109-16-19-23-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is the designated game “3”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is the designated game “3” as a result of performing the process of acquiring the game type in step S109-16-1. If it is determined that the game type is the designated game “3” (step S109-16-19-23-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-6, When it is determined that the game type is not the designated game “3” (step S109-16-19-23-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-7.

(Step S109-16-19-23-6)
In step S109-16-19-23-6, the main CPU 301 performs an instruction game “3” process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery process for determining whether or not to add the instruction game “5” remaining game counter, a process for turning on the accessory operation “3” operation flag when a bonus is won, etc. I do. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-6 ends, the subroutine of the instructed gaming state management process “1-3” ends, and the process proceeds to step S109-17 of the information setting process.

(Step S109-16-19-23-7)
In step S109-16-19-23-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is the designated game “4”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is the designated game “4” as a result of performing the process of acquiring the game type in step S109-16-1. If it is determined that the game type is the designated game “4” (step S109-16-19-23-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-8, When it is determined that the game type is not the designated game “4” (step S109-16-19-23-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-9.

(Step S109-16-19-23-8)
In step S109-16-19-23-8, the main CPU 301 performs an instruction game “4” process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 continuously generates the next set after the “1” set “10” game of the instruction game “4” when the instruction game “4” remaining game counter is not “0”. A lottery process, a lottery process for determining whether or not to add the remaining game counter to the designated game “5” if it has already been decided to continue to generate the next set, and a bonus In the case of winning, the processing such as turning on the accessory operation “3” operation flag is performed. The instruction game “4” remaining game counter is provided in the main RAM 303, and “10” is set to the instruction game “4” remaining game counter when starting the instruction game “4”. Yes. When the process of step S109-16-19-23-8 is completed, the subroutine of the instructed gaming state management process “1-3” is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S109-17 of the information setting process.

(Step S109-16-19-23-9)
In step S109-16-19-23-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is the designated game “5”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is the designated game “5” as a result of performing the process of acquiring the game type in step S109-16-1. If it is determined that the game type is the designated game “5” (step S109-16-19-23-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-10, If it is determined that the game type is not the designated game “5” (step S109-16-19-23-9 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-14.

(Step S109-16-19-23-10)
In step S109-16-19-23-10, the main CPU 301 performs processing for obtaining an instruction game “5” remaining game counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for obtaining the value of the instruction game “5” remaining game counter from the instruction game “5” remaining game counter provided in the main RAM 303 and setting the value in the register. And if the process of step S109-16-19-23-10 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S109-16-19-23-11.

(Steps S109-16-19-23-11)
In step S109-16-19-23-11, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the instruction game “5” remaining game counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the instruction game “5” remaining game counter acquired in step S109-16-19-23-10 is “0”. If it is determined that the instruction game “5” remaining game counter is “0” (step S109-16-19-23-11 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-13. , And when it is determined that the instruction game “5” remaining game counter is not “0” (step S109-16-19-23-11 = No), step S109-16-19-23-12 The process is transferred to.

(Step S109-16-19-23-12)
In step S109-16-19-23-12, the main CPU 301 performs a process during the instruction game “5” which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 draws whether or not to add the number of ART sets until the designated game “5” remaining game counter reaches “0”, and when a bonus is won, Processing to turn on the “3” operation flag is performed. When the process of step S109-16-19-23-12 ends, the subroutine of the instruction game state management process “1-3” ends, and the process proceeds to step S109-17 of the information setting process.

(Step S109-16-19-23-13)
In step S109-16-19-23-13, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the designated game “2” as the game type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the designated game “2” in the game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. That is, when the instruction game “5” remaining game counter becomes “0”, the game shifts to the instruction game “2”. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-13 ends, the subroutine of the instructed gaming state management process “1-3” ends, and the process proceeds to step S109-17 of the information setting process.

(Step S109-16-19-23-14)
In step S109-16-19-23-14, the main CPU 301 performs a continuous effect state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of lottering whether or not to add the number of ART sets, or a process of turning on the accessory operation “3” operation flag when a bonus is won. When the process of step S109-16-19-23-14 ends, the subroutine of the instruction game state management process “1-3” ends, and the process proceeds to step S109-17 of the information setting process.

(Instruction game "1" during processing)
Next, based on FIG. 46, the instruction game “1” process performed by the process of step S109-16-19-23-2 of FIG. 45 will be described. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing during the instruction game “1”.

(Step S109-16-19-23-2-1)
In step S109-16-19-23-2-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the instruction game lottery table “7”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 reads out the instruction game lottery table “7” stored in the main ROM 302 and sets it in the register. Along with the setting of the instruction game lottery table “7”, the main CPU 301 performs processing for obtaining the ART level from the ART level storage area of the main RAM 303 and setting it in the register. In addition to the setting of the instruction game lottery table “7”, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring the winning combination from the winning combination storing area of the main RAM 303 and setting it in the register. Thereby, the reference location of the designated game lottery table “7” is determined according to the current ART level and the winning combination. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-2-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-2-2.

(Step S109-16-19-23-2-2)
In step S109-16-19-23-2-2, the main CPU 301 performs a hard random number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for extracting the random number value generated by the main random number generator 304 and processing for storing the extracted random number value in a register. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-2-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-2-3.

(Step S109-16-19-23-2-3)
In step S109-16-19-23-2-3, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is based on the designated game lottery table “7”, the current ART level, the winning combination stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303, and the extracted random number value. Then, a process of drawing whether or not to add the number of ART sets is performed. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-2-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-2-4.

(Step S109-16-19-23-2-4)
In step S109-16-19-23-2-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a winning result is obtained as a result of the lottery process in step S109-16-19-23-2-3. And when it determines with having won (step S109-16-19-23-2-4 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S109-16-19-23-2-5, and is not winning Is determined (step S109-16-19-23-2-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-2-6.

(Step S109-16-19-23-2-5)
In step S109-16-19-23-2-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of “+1” the number of ART sets. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of “+1” the number of ART sets in the ART set number storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-2-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-2-6.

(Step S109-16-19-23-2-6)
In step S109-16-19-23-2-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a bonus is won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 confirms whether any of “BB01” to “BB03” is stored in the winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and determines whether or not the bonus is won. Perform the process. If it is determined that the bonus is won (step S109-16-19-23-2-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-2-7. If it is determined that the bonus is not won (step S109-16-19-23-2-6 = No), the subroutine of the process during the instruction game “1” is terminated, and the information setting process step S109— The processing is shifted to 17.

(Step S109-16-19-23-2-7)
In step S109-16-19-23-2-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a bonus seed lottery distribution table. Specifically, the main CPU 301 reads a bonus type lottery distribution table stored in the main ROM 302 and performs a process of setting it in a register. The main CPU 301 obtains a setting value from the setting value storage area of the main RAM 303 and sets it in the register in conjunction with the setting of the bonus type lottery distribution table. Thereby, the reference location of the bonus type lottery distribution table is determined according to the set value. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-2-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-2-8.

(Step S109-16-19-23-2-8)
In step S109-16-19-23-2-8, the main CPU 301 performs a hard random number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for extracting the random number value generated by the main random number generator 304 and processing for storing the extracted random number value in a register. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-2-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-2-9.

(Step S109-16-19-23-2-9)
In step S109-16-19-23-2-9, the main CPU 301 performs a bonus seed lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the action “2” or the action “3” based on the bonus type lottery distribution table, the set value that has been set, and the extracted random number value. Sorting lottery processing is performed. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-2-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-2-10.

(Step S109-16-19-23-2-10)
In step S <b> 109-16-19-23-2-10, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the accessory operation “3” has been won. Specifically, in step S109-16-19-23-2-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the bonus item operation “3” has been won as a result of performing the bonus type lottery process. . If it is determined that the combination act “3” has been won (step S109-16-19-23-2-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-2-11. If it is determined that the combination act “3” is not won (step S109-16-19-23-2-10 = No), step S109-16-19-23-2-12 The process is transferred to.

(Step S109-16-19-23-2-11)
In step S <b> 109-16-19-23-2-11, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the accessory operation “3” operation flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the accessory action “3” action flag in the accessory action flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-2-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-2-13.

(Step S109-16-19-23-2-12)
In step S109-16-19-23-2-12, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the accessory operation “2” operation flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the accessory action “2” action flag in the accessory action flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-2-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-2-13.

(Step S109-16-19-23-2-13)
In step S109-16-19-23-2-13, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “2” inside as the game type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “2” inside the game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-2-13 ends, the subroutine of the in-progress game “1” process ends, and the process proceeds to step S109-17 of the information setting process.

(Instruction game "2" during processing)
Next, based on FIG. 47, the instruction game “2” processing performed by the processing of step S109-16-19-23-4 of FIG. 45 will be described. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing during the designated game “2”.

(Step S109-16-19-23-4-1)
In step S <b> 109-16-19-23-4-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of “−1” on the instruction game “2” game number remaining counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of “−1” the value of the instruction game “2” game number remaining counter provided in the main RAM 303. Here, the instruction game “2” game number remaining counter is provided in the main RAM 303, and is a counter in which the number of games in the ART state (instruction game “2”) composed of “1” set “40” games is set. Configure. That is, as an initial value when the ART state (instruction game “2”) is activated, “40” is set in the instruction game “2” game number remaining counter, and every time this process is performed (every game). In addition, when the instruction game “2” game number remaining counter is set to “−1” and the instruction game “2” game number remaining counter becomes “0”, the ART state of the “1” set (instruction game “2”) is changed. finish. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, a lottery for whether to add to the number of ART sets is performed, and a lottery for whether to add directly to the number of ART games is not performed. The maximum value set in the game “2” game number remaining counter is “40”. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-4-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-4-2.

(Step S109-16-19-23-4-2)
In step S109-16-19-23-4-2, the main CPU 301 performs a winning combination acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a value stored in a winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303 and setting the value in a register. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-4-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-3-4.

(Step S109-16-19-23-4-3)
In step S109-16-19-23-3-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a bonus is won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 confirms whether any of “BB01” to “BB03” is stored in the winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and determines whether or not the bonus is won. Perform the process. If it is determined that the bonus is won (step S109-16-19-23-4-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-4-4, If it is determined that the bonus is not won (step S109-16-19-23-4-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-4-10.

(Step S109-16-19-23-4-4)
In step S109-16-19-23-4-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “2” inside as the game type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “2” inside the game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-4-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-4-4-5.

(Step S109-16-19-23-4-5)
In step S109-16-19-23-4-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a bonus seed lottery distribution table. Specifically, the main CPU 301 reads a bonus type lottery distribution table stored in the main ROM 302 and performs a process of setting it in a register. The main CPU 301 obtains a setting value from the setting value storage area of the main RAM 303 and sets it in the register in conjunction with the setting of the bonus type lottery distribution table. Thereby, the reference location of the bonus type lottery distribution table is determined according to the set value. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-4-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-4-4.

(Step S109-16-19-23-4-6)
In step S109-16-19-23-4-4, the main CPU 301 performs a hard random number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for extracting the random number value generated by the main random number generator 304 and processing for storing the extracted random number value in a register. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-4-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-4-4.

(Steps S109-16-19-23-4-7)
In step S109-16-19-23-4-7, the main CPU 301 performs a bonus type lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the action “2” or the action “3” based on the bonus type lottery distribution table, the set value that has been set, and the extracted random number value. Sorting lottery processing is performed. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-4-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-4-4.

(Step S109-16-19-23-4-8)
In step S109-16-19-23-4-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the accessory operation “3” has been won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the bonus item operation “3” is won as a result of the bonus type lottery process in step S109-16-19-23-4-7. . If it is determined that the item act “3” has been won (step S109-16-19-23-4-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-4-9. If it is determined that the combination act “3” has not been won (step S109-16-19-23-4-8 = No), the subroutine of the process during the instruction game “2” is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to step S109-17 of the information setting process.

(Step S109-16-19-23-4-9)
In step S <b> 109-16-19-23-4-9, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the accessory operation “3” operation flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the accessory action “3” action flag in the accessory action flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S109-16-19-23-4-9 ends, the subroutine of the in-game game “2” process ends, and the process proceeds to step S109-17 of the information setting process.

(Step S109-16-19-23-4-10)
In step S109-16-19-23-4-10, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the number of remaining ART sets. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the remaining number of ART sets stored in the ART set number storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-4-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-23-4-11.

(Step S109-16-19-23-4-11)
In step S <b> 109-16-19-23-4-11, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the remaining ART set number is “1”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the number of remaining ART sets is “1” as a result of acquiring the number of remaining ART sets in step S109-16-19-23-4-10. Do. If it is determined that the number of remaining ART sets is “1” (step S109-16-19-23-4-11 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-4-12. And when it is determined that the number of remaining ART sets is not “1” (step S109-16-19-23-4-11 = No), step S109-16-19-23-4-18 The process is transferred to.

  Here, in the present embodiment, when the instruction game “2” game number remaining counter is determined to be “0” in the instruction game “2” end determination process of FIG. Is subtracted to move to the continuous performance state. Then, in the third stop time continuation effect state process of FIG. 65 described later, when the remaining ART set number is “0”, the state is changed to the normal state (normally “2”). Therefore, the minimum value of the number of remaining ART sets acquired in step S109-16-19-23-4-10 is “1”, and the remaining ART set is determined in step S109-16-19-23-4-11. When the number is not “1”, the number of remaining ART sets equal to or greater than “2” is acquired in step S109-16-19-23-4-10.

(Step S109-16-19-23-4-12)
In step S109-16-19-23-4-12, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the instruction game lottery table “7”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 reads out the instruction game lottery table “7” stored in the main ROM 302 and sets it in the register. Along with the setting of the instruction game lottery table “7”, the main CPU 301 performs processing for obtaining the ART level from the ART level storage area of the main RAM 303 and setting it in the register. Thereby, the reference location of the designated game lottery table “7” is determined according to the current ART level. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-4-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-24-13.

(Step S109-16-19-23-24-13)
In step S109-16-19-23-3-4-13, the main CPU 301 performs a winning combination acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a value stored in a winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303 and setting the value in a register. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-4-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-4-14.

(Steps S109-16-19-23-4-14)
In step S109-16-19-23-4-14, the main CPU 301 performs a hard random number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for extracting the random number value generated by the main random number generator 304 and processing for storing the extracted random number value in a register. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-4-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-24-15.

(Step S109-16-19-23-4-15)
In step S109-16-19-23-4-15, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is based on the designated game lottery table “7”, the current ART level, the winning combination stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303, and the extracted random number value. Then, a process of drawing whether or not to add the number of ART sets is performed. When the process of step S109-16-19-23-4-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-4-16.

(Step S109-16-19-23-4-16)
In step S109-16-19-23-4-16, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is performed as a result of the lottery process in step S109-16-19-23-4-15. And when it determines with having won (step S109-16-19-23-4-16 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S109-16-19-23-4-17, and is not winning (Step S109-16-19-23-4-16 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-24-21.

(Step S109-16-19-23-4-17)
In step S109-16-19-23-4-17, the main CPU 301 performs a process of “+1” the number of ART sets. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of “+1” the number of ART sets in the ART set number storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-4-17 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-24-21.

(Step S109-16-19-23-4-18)
In step S109-16-19-23-3-4-18, the main CPU 301 performs an ART set number special lottery process. Specifically, when the main CPU 301 determines in step S109-16-19-23-4-4-11 that the number of remaining ART sets is not “1”, that is, is “2” or more, A lottery process for determining whether or not to further add the number of ART sets is performed. For example, the main CPU 301 extracts a random number value generated by the main random number generator 304 and refers to the instruction game lottery table “5” to perform a lottery process for determining whether or not to further add the number of ART sets. When the process of step S109-16-19-23-4-18 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-24-19.

(Step S109-16-19-23-4-19)
In step S109-16-19-23-4-19, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is won as a result of performing the ART set number special lottery process in step S109-16-19-23-4-18. And when it determines with having won (step S109-16-19-23-4-19 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S109-16-19-23-4-20, and is not winning Is determined (step S109-16-19-23-4-19 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-24-21.

(Step S109-16-19-23-4-20)
In step S109-16-19-23-4-20, the main CPU 301 performs a process of incrementing the number of ART sets by “+1”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of “+1” the number of ART sets in the ART set number storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S109-16-19-23-4-20 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-24-21.

(Step S109-16-19-23-24-21)
In step S109-16-19-23-24-21, the main CPU 301 performs an instruction game “4” transition lottery process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery to move to the instruction game “4”. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-4-21 ends, the subroutine of the instruction game “2” processing is ended, and the process proceeds to step S109-17 of the information setting process.

(Instruction game "4" transition lottery process)
Next, based on FIG. 48, the instruction game “4” transition lottery process performed by the process of step S109-16-19-23-4-21 of FIG. 47 will be described. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the instruction game “4” transition lottery process.

(Step S109-16-19-23-3-4-21-1)
In step S109-16-19-23-23-21-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an instruction game “4” transition lottery table. Specifically, the main CPU 301 reads out the instruction game “4” transition lottery table stored in the main ROM 302 and performs a process of setting it in the register. In addition to the setting of the instruction game “4” transition lottery table, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring the setting value from the setting value storage area of the main RAM 303 and setting it in the register. Thereby, the reference location of the designated game “4” transition lottery table is determined according to the set value. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-23-21-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-23-21-2.

(Step S109-16-19-23-23-4-21-2)
In step S109-16-19-23-3-4-21-2, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the instruction game “4” based on the instruction game “4” transition lottery table, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and the extracted random number value. To perform a lottery process on whether or not to shift to "." Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-23-21-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-23-21-3.

(Step S109-16-19-23-24-21-3)
In step S <b> 109-16-19-23-4-21-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not it has been won as a result of performing the lottery process for shifting to the designated game “4” in step S109-16-19-23-24-21-2. I do. And when it determines with having been elected (step S109-16-19-23-3-21-3 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S109-16-19-23-23-21-21, If it is determined that the winning combination has not been won (step S109-16-19-23-3-21-3 = No), the instruction game “4” transition lottery processing subroutine is terminated, and the information setting processing step S109 is completed. The process is shifted to -17.

(Step S109-16-19-23-4-21-4)
In step S109-16-19-23-3-21-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the designated game “4” as the game type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the designated game “4” in the game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-24-21-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-24-21-5.

(Step S109-16-19-23-24-21-5)
In step S109-16-19-23-3-4-21-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “10” to the instruction game “4” remaining game counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “10” to the instruction game “4” remaining game counter provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S109-16-19-23-3-21-5 ends, the subroutine of the instruction game “4” transition lottery process ends, and the process proceeds to step S109-17 of the information setting process.

(Instruction game "3" during processing)
Next, based on FIG. 49, the instruction game “3” processing performed by the processing of steps S109-16-19-23-6 of FIG. 45 will be described. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing during the designated game “3”.

(Step S109-16-19-23-6-1)
In step S109-16-19-23-6-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the designated game lottery table “11”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of reading the instruction game lottery table “11” stored in the main ROM 302 and setting it in the register. In addition to the setting of the instruction game lottery table “11”, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring the winning combination from the winning combination storing area of the main RAM 303 and setting it in the register. Thereby, the reference location of the designated game lottery table “11” is determined according to the winning combination. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-6-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-6-2.

(Step S109-16-19-23-6-2)
In step S109-16-19-23-6-2, the main CPU 301 performs a hard random number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for extracting the random number value generated by the main random number generator 304 and processing for storing the extracted random number value in a register. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-6-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-6-6.

(Step S109-16-19-23-6-3)
In step S109-16-19-23-6-6, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the designated game “5” based on the designated game lottery table “11”, the winning combination stored in the winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and the extracted random number value. The lottery process is performed to determine whether or not the remaining game counter is added. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-6-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-6-6.

(Step S109-16-19-23-6-4)
In step S109-16-19-23-6-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not it has been won as a result of performing a lottery process for adding an instruction game “5” remaining game counter in step S109-16-19-23-6-3. Process. And when it determines with having won (step S109-16-19-23-6-4 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S109-16-19-23-6-6, and is not winning Is determined (step S109-16-19-23-6-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-6-6.

(Step S109-16-19-23-6-6-5)
In step S109-16-19-23-6-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding an instruction game “5” remaining game counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding an instruction game “5” remaining game counter provided in the main RAM 303. In the lottery using the instruction game lottery table “11”, “1”, “3”, or “5” can be obtained by one lottery, so the counter is added by the amount obtained. For example, if “5” is won, the counter is “+5”. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-6-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-6-6.

(Step S109-16-19-23-6-6)
In step S109-16-19-23-6-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a bonus is won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 confirms whether any of “BB01” to “BB03” is stored in the winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and determines whether or not the bonus is won. Perform the process. If it is determined that the bonus is won (step S109-16-19-23-6-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-6-7, When it is determined that the bonus has not been won (step S109-16-19-23-6-6 = No), the subroutine of the process in the instruction game “3” is terminated, and the information setting process step S109- The processing is shifted to 17.

(Step S109-16-19-23-6-7)
In step S <b> 109-16-19-23-6-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the accessory operation “3” operation flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the accessory action “3” action flag in the accessory action flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-6-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-6-6.

(Step S109-16-19-23-6-8)
In step S <b> 109-16-19-23-6-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “2” inside as the game type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “2” inside the game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-6-8 ends, the subroutine for the in-game game “3” is ended, and the process proceeds to step S109-17 of the information setting process.

(Instruction game "4" during processing)
Next, based on FIG. 50, the instruction game “4” processing performed by the processing of step S109-16-19-23-8 of FIG. 45 will be described. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing during the instruction game “4”.

(Step S109-16-19-23-8-1)
In step S <b> 109-16-19-23-8-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for obtaining an instruction game “4” remaining game counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the value of the instruction game “4” remaining game counter provided in the main RAM 303 and setting the value in the register. And if the process of step S109-16-19-23-8-1 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S109-16-19-23-8-2.

(Step S109-16-19-23-8-2)
In step S109-16-19-23-8-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the instruction game “4” remaining game counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the instruction game “4” remaining game counter acquired in step S109-16-19-23-8-1 is “0”. Do. If it is determined that the instruction game “4” remaining game counter is “0” (step S109-16-19-23-8-2 = Yes), the subroutine of the process during the instruction game “4” is executed. If the instruction game “4” remaining game counter is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S109-17 of the information setting process (step S109-16-19-23-8-). 2 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-8-3.

(Step S109-16-19-23-8-3)
In step S109-16-19-23-8-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of "-1" on the instruction game "4" remaining game counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of “−1” the value of the instruction game “4” remaining game counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-8-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-8-8.

(Step S109-16-19-23-8-4)
In step S109-16-19-23-8-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the instruction game lottery table “10”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 reads out the instruction game lottery table “10” stored in the main ROM 302 and sets it in the register. Along with the setting of the instruction game lottery table “10”, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring the winning combination from the winning combination storing area of the main RAM 303 and setting it in the register. Thereby, the reference location of the designated game lottery table “10” is determined according to the winning combination and the set value acquired in step S109-16-19-23-8-5 described later. Then, when step S109-16-19-23-8-4 is completed, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-8-5.

(Step S109-16-19-23-8-5)
In step S109-16-19-23-8-5, the main CPU 301 performs a setting value acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring a setting value stored in a setting value storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and setting it in a register. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-8-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-8-6.

(Step S109-16-19-23-8-6)
In step S109-16-19-23-8-6, the main CPU 301 performs a hard random number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for extracting the random number value generated by the main random number generator 304 and processing for storing the extracted random number value in a register. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-8-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-8-7.

(Step S109-16-19-23-8-7)
In Step S109-16-19-23-8-7, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 stores the designated game lottery table “10”, the winning combination stored in the winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and the setting value storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Based on the set value and the extracted random number value, when the “1” set and “10” game in the current designated game “4” is finished, the process proceeds to the next “1” set and “10” game. A lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to make it. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-8-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-8-8.

(Step S109-16-19-23-8-8)
In step S109-16-19-23-8-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, in step S109-16-19-23-8-7, the main CPU 301 determines the next “ As a result of the lottery process for determining whether or not to shift to the “1” set and “10” game, a process for determining whether or not the game is won is performed. And when it determines with having won (step S109-16-19-23-8-8 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S109-16-19-23-8-9, and is not winning Is determined (step S109-16-19-23-8-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-8-10.

(Step S109-16-19-23-8-9)
In step S <b> 109-16-19-23-8-9, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the instruction game “4” operation flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of turning on the instruction game “4” operation flag in the instruction game “4” operation flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Here, the instruction game “4” operation flag refers to the next “1” set and “10” game when the “1” set and “10” game in the current instruction game “4” ends. This flag indicates that the lottery process for determining whether or not to win, and when the flag is ON, whether or not to add the remaining game counter in the indicated game “5” in the indicated game “4”. The lottery process is performed. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-8-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-8-10.

(Step S109-16-19-23-8-10)
In step S109-16-19-23-8-10, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the instruction game “4” operation flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the instruction game “4” operation flag is ON in the instruction game “4” operation flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the instruction game “4” operation flag is ON (step S109-16-19-23-8-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-8-11. When the process is shifted and it is determined that the instruction game “4” operation flag is not ON (step S109-16-19-23-8-10 = No), step S109-16-19-23-8 The process is shifted to -16.

(Step S109-16-19-23-8-11)
In step S109-16-19-23-8-11, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the instruction game lottery table “13”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of reading the instruction game lottery table “13” stored in the main ROM 302 and setting it in the register. Along with the setting of the instruction game lottery table “13”, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring the winning combination from the winning combination storing area of the main RAM 303 and setting it in the register. Thereby, the reference location of the designated game lottery table “13” is determined according to the winning combination. And if the process of step S109-16-19-23-8-11 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S109-16-19-23-8-12.

(Step S109-16-19-23-8-12)
In step S109-16-19-23-8-12, the main CPU 301 performs a hard random number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for extracting the random number value generated by the main random number generator 304 and processing for storing the extracted random number value in a register. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-8-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-8-13.

(Step S109-16-19-23-8-13)
In step S109-16-19-23-8-13, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the designated game “5” based on the designated game lottery table “13”, the winning combination stored in the winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and the extracted random number value. A lottery process for determining whether or not to add the remaining game counter is performed. And if the process of step S109-16-19-23-8-13 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S109-16-19-23-8-14.

(Step S109-16-19-23-8-14)
In step S109-16-19-23-8-14, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, in step S109-16-19-23-8-13, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery process on whether or not to add the remaining game counter in the instruction game “5”, and whether or not the winning is made. The process which determines is performed. And when it determines with having won (step S109-16-19-23-8-14 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S109-16-19-23-8-15, and is not winning Is determined (step S109-16-19-23-8-14 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-8-19.

(Step S109-16-19-23-8-15)
In step S <b> 109-16-19-23-8-15, the main CPU 301 performs processing for adding the instruction game “5” remaining game counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding an instruction game “5” remaining game counter provided in the main RAM 303. In the lottery using the instruction game lottery table “13”, “1”, “3”, or “5” can be obtained by one lottery, so the counter is added by the amount obtained. For example, if “5” is won, the counter is “+5”. And if the process of step S109-16-19-23-8-15 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S109-16-19-23-8-19.

(Step S109-16-19-23-8-16)
In step S109-16-19-23-8-16, the main CPU 301 performs processing for obtaining an instruction game “5” remaining game counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the value of the instruction game “5” remaining game counter provided in the main RAM 303 and setting the value in the register. And if the process of step S109-16-19-23-8-16 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S109-16-19-23-8-17.

(Step S109-16-19-23-8-17)
In step S <b> 109-16-19-23-8-17, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the instruction game “5” remaining game counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the instruction game “5” remaining game counter set in the register is “0” in step S109-16-19-23-8-16. I do. If it is determined that the instruction game “5” remaining game counter is “0” (step S109-16-19-23-8-17 = Yes), step S109-16-19-23-8 When the process is shifted to -18 and it is determined that the instruction game “5” remaining game counter is not “0” (step S109-16-19-23-8-17 = No), step S109-16 The process shifts to -19-23-8-19.

(Step S109-16-19-23-8-18)
In step S109-16-19-23-8-18, the main CPU 301 performs a process of “+1” the instruction game “5” remaining game counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of “+1” the instruction game “5” remaining game counter provided in the main RAM 303. As a result, the value of the instruction game “5” remaining game counter becomes “1”. In the lottery process of step S109-16-19-23-8-7, “1” set in the current instruction game “4” is set. When the “10” game ends, even if it is not possible to shift to the next “1” set or “10” game (the instruction game “4” ends with only the “1” set) Even in this case, the designated game “5” can be played in the “1” game. That is, the process of “+1” in step S109-16-19-23-8-18 can be said to be a process of giving the minimum guaranteed number of games for executing the designated game “5”. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a decrease in game entertainment due to the fact that the designated game “5” cannot be played after the transition to the designated game “4”. Note that the value of the instruction game “5” remaining game counter to be added in step S109-16-19-23-8-18 may be arbitrarily changed. For example, it may be “2” or more. Further, the process itself in steps S109-16-19-23-8-18 may not be performed, and the minimum guaranteed number of games may not be given. And if the process of step S109-16-19-23-8-18 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S109-16-19-23-8-19.

(Step S109-16-19-23-8-19)
In step S109-16-19-23-8-19, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a bonus is won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 confirms whether any of “BB01” to “BB03” is stored in the winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and determines whether or not the bonus is won. Perform the process. If it is determined that the bonus is won (step S109-16-19-23-8-19 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-8-20. If it is determined that the bonus has not been won (step S109-16-19-23-8-19 = No), the subroutine of the process during the instruction game “4” is terminated, and the information setting process step S109- The processing is shifted to 17.

(Step S109-16-19-23-8-20)
In step S <b> 109-16-19-23-8-20, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the accessory operation “3” operation flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the accessory action “3” action flag in the accessory action flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when step S109-16-19-23-8-20 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-8-21.

(Steps S109-16-19-23-8-21)
In step S109-16-19-23-8-21, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “2” inside as the game type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “2” inside the game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of steps S109-16-19-23-8-21 is completed, the subroutine of the process during the instruction game “4” is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S109-17 of the information setting process.

(Instruction game "5" during processing)
Next, based on FIG. 51, the instruction game “5” processing performed by the processing of steps S109-16-19-23-12 of FIG. 45 will be described. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing during the designated game “5”.

(Step S109-16-19-23-12-1)
In step S109-16-19-23-12-1, main CPU301 performs the process which acquires instruction | indication game "5" remaining game counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the value of the instruction game “5” remaining game counter provided in the main RAM 303 and setting the value in the register. And if the process of step S109-16-19-23-12-1 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S109-16-19-23-12-2.

(Step S109-16-19-23-12-2)
In step S109-16-19-23-12-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the instruction game “5” remaining game counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of “−1” the value of the instruction game “5” remaining game counter provided in the main RAM 303. And if the process of step S109-16-19-23-12-2 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S109-16-19-23-12-3.

(Steps S109-16-19-23-12-3)
In step S109-16-19-23-13-3, the main CPU 301 performs a winning combination acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a value stored in a winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303 and setting the value in a register. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-12-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-12-4.

(Steps S109-16-19-23-12-4)
In step S109-16-19-23-12-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning combination is lost. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines that the winning combination has been lost based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303 acquired in step S109-16-19-23-12-3. Processing for determining whether or not there is present is performed. If it is determined that the winning combination is out of play (step S109-16-19-23-12-4 = Yes), the subroutine of the process during the instruction game “5” is terminated, and the information setting process step When the process proceeds to S109-17 and it is determined that the winning combination is not out of step (step S109-16-19-23-12-4 = No), step S109-16-19-23-12- The processing is shifted to 5.

(Step S109-16-19-23-12-5)
In step S109-16-19-23-12-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the designated game lottery table “9”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 reads out the instruction game lottery table “9” stored in the main ROM 302 and sets it in the register. In addition to the setting of the instruction game lottery table “9”, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring the winning combination from the winning combination storing area of the main RAM 303 and setting it in the register. Thereby, the reference location of the designated game lottery table “9” is determined according to the winning combination. And if the process of step S109-16-19-23-12-5 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S109-16-19-23-12-6.

(Steps S109-16-19-23-12-6)
In step S109-16-19-23-12-6, the main CPU 301 performs a hard random number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for extracting the random number value generated by the main random number generator 304 and processing for storing the extracted random number value in a register. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-12-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-13-7.

(Step S109-16-19-23-12-7)
In step S109-16-19-23-13-7, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 adds the number of ART sets based on the designated game lottery table “9”, the winning combination stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303, and the extracted random number value. A lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to make it. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-12-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-12-8.

(Step S109-16-19-23-12-8)
In step S109-16-19-23-12-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made as a result of the lottery process of whether or not to add the number of ART sets in step S109-16-19-23-12-7. Do. And when it determines with having won (step S109-16-19-23-12-8 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S109-16-19-23-12-9, and is not winning If it is determined (step S109-16-19-23-12-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-12-10.

(Step S109-16-19-23-12-9)
In step S109-16-19-23-12-9, the main CPU 301 performs an ART set number addition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for adding the number of ART sets to an ART set number storage area provided in the main RAM 303. In addition, in the lottery using the instruction game lottery table “9”, “1” set, “2” set, or “3” set can be acquired by one lottery, so the number of ART sets is added by the amount acquired. . For example, if the “3” set is won, the number of ART sets is “+3”. This ensures that “3” sets of ART for “1” set and “40” game are performed. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-12-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-12-10.

(Step S109-16-19-23-12-10)
In step S109-16-19-23-12-10, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a bonus is won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 confirms whether any of “BB01” to “BB03” is stored in the winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and determines whether or not the bonus is won. Perform the process. If it is determined that the bonus is won (step S109-16-19-23-12-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-12-11, If it is determined that the bonus has not been won (step S109-16-19-23-12-10 = No), the subroutine of the process in the instruction game “5” is ended, and the information setting process step S109- The processing is shifted to 17.

(Steps S109-16-19-23-12-11)
In step S <b> 109-16-19-23-12-11, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the accessory operation “3” operation flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the accessory action “3” action flag in the accessory action flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. And if the process of step S109-16-19-23-12-11 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S109-16-19-23-12-12.

(Step S109-16-19-23-12-12)
In step S109-16-19-23-12-12, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “2” inside as the game type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “2” inside the game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-12-12 is completed, the subroutine of the instruction game “5” is ended, and the process proceeds to step S109-17 of the information setting process.

(Continuous performance state processing)
Next, based on FIG. 52, the continuous effect state process performed by the process of step S109-16-19-23-14 of FIG. 45 is demonstrated. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a subroutine of continuous effect state processing.

(Step S109-16-19-23-14-1)
In step S109-16-19-23-14-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the continuous effect state counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the continuous effect state counter provided in the main RAM 303. Here, for example, “3” is set as the initial value in the continuous effect state counter, and is “−1” in the process each time the “1” game is consumed. Therefore, whether the “ART state” continues to move to the next set or whether the “ART state” ends without continuing is notified over the “3” game. And if the process of step S109-16-19-23-14-1 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S109-16-19-23-14-2.

(Step S109-16-19-23-14-2)
In step S109-16-19-23-14-2, the main CPU 301 performs a winning combination acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a value stored in a winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303 and setting the value in a register. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-14-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-14-3.

(Step S109-16-19-23-14-3)
In step S109-16-19-23-14-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a bonus is won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 confirms whether any of “BB01” to “BB03” is stored in the winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and determines whether or not the bonus is won. Perform the process. If it is determined that the bonus is won (step S109-16-19-23-14-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-14-4. If it is determined that the bonus is not won (step S109-16-19-23-14-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-14-6.

(Step S109-16-19-23-14-4)
In step S109-16-19-23-14-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the accessory operation “3” operation flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the accessory action “3” action flag in the accessory action flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. And if the process of step S109-16-19-23-14-4 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S109-16-19-23-14-5.

(Step S109-16-19-23-14-5)
In step S109-16-19-23-14-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “2” inside as the game type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “2” inside the game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S109-16-19-23-14-5 ends, the continuous effect state process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S109-17 of the information setting process.

(Step S109-16-19-23-14-6)
In step S109-16-19-23-14-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the designated game lottery table “7”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 reads out the instruction game lottery table “7” stored in the main ROM 302 and sets it in the register. Along with the setting of the instruction game lottery table “7”, the main CPU 301 performs processing for obtaining the ART level from the ART level storage area of the main RAM 303 and setting it in the register. In addition to the setting of the instruction game lottery table “7”, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring the winning combination from the winning combination storing area of the main RAM 303 and setting it in the register. Thereby, the reference location of the designated game lottery table “7” is determined according to the current ART level and the winning combination. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-14-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-14-7.

(Step S109-16-19-23-14-7)
In step S109-16-19-23-14-7, the main CPU 301 performs a hard random number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for extracting the random number value generated by the main random number generator 304 and processing for storing the extracted random number value in a register. Then, when the process of step S109-16-19-23-14-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-19-23-14-8.

(Step S109-16-19-23-14-8)
In step S109-16-19-23-14-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is performed as a result of the lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is based on the designated game lottery table “7”, the current ART level, the winning combination stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303, and the extracted random number value. Whether or not to add the number of ART sets is determined by lottery, and a process of determining whether or not the result of the lottery is won. And when it determines with having been won (step S109-16-19-23-14-8 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S109-16-19-23-14-9, and is not winning. Is determined (step S109-16-19-23-14-8 = No), the continuous effect state process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S109-17 of the information setting process.

(Step S109-16-19-23-14-9)
In step S109-16-19-23-14-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of “+1” the number of ART sets. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of “+1” the number of ART sets in the ART set number storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S109-16-19-23-14-9 ends, the continuous effect state process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S109-17 of the information setting process.

(Processing for waiting for fall)
Next, based on FIG. 53, the fall waiting state process performed by the process of step S109-17 of FIG. 39 will be described. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the fall waiting state process.

(Step S109-17-1)
In step S109-17-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether the game type is normally “1” or normal “2”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether the game type is normally “1” or normal “2” as a result of performing the process of acquiring the game type in step S109-6. Do. If it is determined that the game type is normally “1” or normal “2” (step S109-17-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-17-2, and the game type is If it is determined that it is not normally “1” or normally “2” (step S109-17-1 = No), the fall waiting state processing subroutine is terminated, and the information setting process proceeds to step S109-18. Migrate processing.

(Step S109-17-2)
In step S109-17-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether the RT gaming state is the “third RT gaming state”, the “fourth RT gaming state”, or the “fifth RT gaming state”. . Specifically, the main CPU 301 refers to the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and the current RT gaming state is “third RT gaming state”, “fourth RT gaming state”, or “fifth RT gaming”. A process of determining whether the state is one of “state” is performed. When it is determined that the RT gaming state is any one of the “third RT gaming state”, the “fourth RT gaming state”, or the “fifth RT gaming state” (step S109-17-2 = Yes). When the process proceeds to step S109-17-3, and it is determined that the RT gaming state is neither the “third RT gaming state”, the “fourth RT gaming state”, or the “fifth RT gaming state”. (Step S109-17-2 = No), the fall waiting state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to Step S109-18 of the information setting process.

(Step S109-17-3)
In step S109-17-3, the main CPU 301 performs a winning combination acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a value stored in a winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303 and setting the value in a register. Then, when the process of step S109-17-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-17-4.

(Step S109-17-4)
In step S109-17-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a bonus is won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 confirms whether any of “BB01” to “BB03” is stored in the winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and determines whether or not the bonus is won. Perform the process. When it is determined that the bonus is won (step S109-17-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-17-5, and when it is determined that the bonus is not won. (Step S109-17-4 = No), the fall waiting state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to Step S109-18 of the information setting process.

(Step S109-17-5)
In step S109-17-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “1” inside as the game type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “1” inside the game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S109-17-5 is completed, the subroutine for the fall waiting state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S109-18 of the information setting process.

  It should be noted that a situation in which “1” or “2” is normal and the state is either “3rd RT gaming state”, “4th RT gaming state”, or “5th RT gaming state” means that the BB has ended. From the time (for example, “3rd RT gaming state”) to when the state transition replay is displayed and before shifting to the “first RT gaming state”, or when the ART state is terminated (for example, “3rd RT gaming state”) ) Until the state transition replay is displayed and the state transitions to the “first RT gaming state”. In such a situation, since the probability of winning the state transition replay is set high (see FIGS. 14 and 16), the period until the transition to the “first RT gaming state” is shortened. Therefore, in such a short period, when BB is won, a privilege may be given to the player. For example, in step S109-17-5, “2” in the inside may be set. Thereby, game entertainment can be improved.

(Game state transition process)
Next, based on FIG. 54, the game state transition process performed by the process of step S116 of FIG. 36 will be described. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the game state transition process.

(Step S116-1)
In step S116-1, the main CPU 301 performs display symbol confirmation processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of confirming the combination of display symbols displayed on the active line based on the determination result of the display determination process in step S114 in the main loop process. Then, when the process of step S116-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-2.

(Step S116-2)
In step S116-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a bonus symbol is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a bonus symbol is displayed based on the combination of display symbols confirmed in the process of step S116-1. If it is determined that a bonus symbol is displayed (step S116-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-3. If it is determined that no bonus symbol is displayed (step S116). -2 = No), the process proceeds to step S116-14.

(Step S116-3)
In step S116-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not an RB symbol is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not an RB symbol is displayed based on the combination of display symbols confirmed in the process of step S116-1. When it is determined that the RB symbol is displayed (step S116-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-4, and when it is determined that the RB symbol is not displayed (step S116). -3 = No), the process proceeds to step S116-5.

(Step S116-4)
In step S116-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of changing the RT gaming state to the “BB RB gaming state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing a value indicating “RB RB gaming state” in the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S116-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-6.

(Step S116-5)
In step S116-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for changing the RT gaming state to the “second RT gaming state during BB”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing a value indicating “second RT gaming state during BB” in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S116-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-6.

(Step S116-6)
In step S116-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the RT gaming state is the “BB RB gaming state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 refers to a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and performs processing for determining whether or not the RT gaming state is the BB gaming state during BB. If it is determined that the RT gaming state is the RB gaming state during BB (step S116-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-16, and the RT gaming state is not the BB gaming state during BB. (Step S116-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S116-7.

(Step S116-7)
In step S116-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a game type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 acquires a game type from a game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and performs a set process on the register. Then, when the process of step S116-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-8.

(Step S116-8)
In step S116-8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether the game type is normally “1”, normal “2”, or “1” inside. Specifically, as a result of performing the process of acquiring the game type in step S116-7, the main CPU 301 determines that the game type is normally “1”, normally “2”, or “ 1 ”is determined. If it is determined that the game type is “1”, “2”, or “1” in the inside (step S116-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-9. If it is determined that the game type is not “1”, “2”, or “1” in the inside (step S116-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S116-10.

(Step S116-9)
In step S116-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the accessory operation “1” as the game type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting an accessory operation “1” in a game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. That is, when the game type is normal “1”, normal “2”, or “1” in the inside, a combination of symbols of any of “BB01” to “BB03” is displayed. Then, the accessory operation “1” is set as the game type. Then, when the process of step S116-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-11.

(Step S116-10)
In step S116-10, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the accessory operation “2” as the game type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the accessory operation “2” in the game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. That is, when the game type is neither “1”, “2”, nor “1” in the inside, a combination of symbols of any of “BB01” to “BB03” is displayed. As a game type, the accessory operation “2” is set. Then, when the process of step S116-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-11.

(Step S116-11)
In step S116-11, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the accessory operation “3” operation flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the accessory action “3” action flag is ON in the accessory action flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the accessory operation “3” operation flag is ON (step S116-11 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-12, and the accessory operation “3” operation flag is ON. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S116-11 = No), the process proceeds to step S116-16.

(Step S116-12)
In step S116-12, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the accessory operation “3” as the game type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the accessory operation “3” in the game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. In other words, when the accessory operation “3” operation flag is ON, the processing of setting the accessory operation “3” in the form of overwriting the game type set in step S116-9 or step S116-10. I do. Then, when the process of step S116-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-13.

(Step S116-13)
In step S116-13, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the accessory operation “3” operation flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the accessory action “3” action flag in the accessory action flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S116-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-16.

(Step S116-14)
In step S116-14, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the BB operation is finished. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the payout number counter provided in the main RAM 303 satisfies the BB termination condition. For example, the main CPU 301 sets “53” to a payout number counter provided in the main RAM 303 when a combination of symbols of BB is displayed. When the payout number counter becomes “0”, it is determined that the BB end condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the BB operation is finished (step S116-14 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-16, and when it is determined that the BB operation is not finished (step S116). −14 = No), the process proceeds to step S116-15.

(Step S116-15)
In step S116-15, the main CPU 301 performs RT gaming state transition processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for shifting the RT gaming state according to the display symbol. For example, when the symbol combination related to the 3RT gaming state transition replay is displayed, the state is shifted to the third RT gaming state, and when the symbol combination related to the fourth RT gaming state transition replay is displayed, the fourth RT is displayed. If the symbol combination related to the first RT gaming state transition replay is displayed, the process of shifting to the first RT gaming state is performed. Then, when the process of step S116-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-16.

(Step S116-16)
In step S116-16, the main CPU 301 performs an instruction game state management process “2-1” which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing according to the set game type. Then, when the process of step S116-16 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-17.

(Step S116-17)
In step S116-17, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the BB operation is finished. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the payout number counter provided in the main RAM 303 satisfies the BB termination condition. When it is determined that the BB operation is finished (step S116-17 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-18, and when it is determined that the BB operation is not finished (step S116). −17 = No), the game state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S116-18)
In step S116-18, the main CPU 301 performs a process of initializing the RAM. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of initializing an initializeable area in the main RAM 303 as the BB operation ends. For example, an effect state counter or the like is initialized in the process. When the process of step S116-18 is completed, the gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Instruction game state management process “2-1”)
Next, based on FIG. 55, the instruction game state management process “2-1” performed by the process of step S116-16 of FIG. 54 will be described. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the instruction game state management process “2-1”.

(Step S116-16-1)
In step S116-16-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a game type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 acquires a game type from a game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and performs a set process on the register. Then, when the process of step S116-16-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-16-2.

(Step S116-16-2)
In step S116-16-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether the game type is normally “1” or normal “2”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether the game type is normally “1” or normal “2” as a result of performing the process of acquiring the game type in step S116-16-1. Process. When it is determined that the game type is normally “1” or normal “2” (step S116-16-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-16-3, and the game type is When it is determined that it is not normally “1” or “2” (step S116-16-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S116-16-8.

(Step S116-16-3)
In step S116-16-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the number of ART sets is set. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the ART set number is set in the ART set number storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the number of ART sets is set (step S116-16-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-16-4, and it is determined that the number of ART sets is not set. If it is determined (step S116-16-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S116-16-5.

(Step S116-16-4)
In step S116-16-4, the main CPU 301 performs an ART initial setting process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting an instruction game “2” game number remaining counter, a process of setting an ART mode, a process of drawing an ART level, and the like. When the process of step S116-16-4 is completed, the subroutine of the instruction game state management process “2-1” is ended, and the process proceeds to step S116-17 of the game state transition process.

(Step S116-16-5)
In step S116-16-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the previous game and the RT gaming state of the game. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring the game state before “1” game and the game state in the game from the game state storage area of the main RAM 303 and setting them in the register. The game state storage area of the main RAM 303 is configured to store the game state before the “1” game and the game state in the game. Then, when the process of step S116-16-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-16-6.

(Step S116-16-6)
In step S116-16-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the previous game is “RT4 gaming state” and the game is “RT1 gaming state”. Specifically, as a result of acquiring the game state before the “1” game and the game state in the game in step S116-16-5, the main CPU 301 obtains the previous game as “RT4 game state” and the game is A process of determining whether or not “RT1 gaming state” is performed. As a situation where the previous game is “RT4 gaming state” and the game is “RT1 gaming state”, the combination of symbols related to the first RT gaming state transition replay is displayed in “RT4 gaming state”. It is done. If it is determined that the previous game is “RT4 gaming state” and the game is “RT1 gaming state” (step S116-16-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-16-7. When it is determined that the previous game is “RT4 gaming state” and the game is not “RT1 gaming state” (step S116-16-6 = No), the subroutine of the instruction gaming state management process “2-1” Is ended, and the process proceeds to step S116-17 of the game state transition process.

(Step S116-16-7)
In step S116-16-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for normally setting “1” as the game type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of normally setting “1” in the game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. That is, in the “RT4 gaming state”, the combination of symbols related to the first RT gaming state transition replay is displayed, so that “1” is normally set as the gaming type. When the process of step S116-16-7 ends, the subroutine of the instruction game state management process “2-1” ends, and the process proceeds to step S116-17 of the game state transition process.

(Step S116-16-8)
In step S116-16-8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether the game type is “1” inside or “2” inside. Specifically, as a result of performing the process of acquiring the game type in step S116-16-1, the main CPU 301 determines whether the game type is “1” inside or “2” inside. Processing to determine is performed. If it is determined that the game type is “1” inside or “2” inside (step S116-16-8 = Yes), the subroutine of the instruction game state management process “2-1” is executed. If the game type is determined not to be “1” in the internal state or “2” in the internal state, the process is shifted to step S116-17 of the game state transition processing (step S116-16-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S116-16-9.

(Step S116-16-9)
In step S116-16-9, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether the game type is the accessory operation “1” or the accessory operation “2”. Specifically, as a result of performing the process of acquiring the game type in step S116-16-1, the main CPU 301 determines that the game type is the accessory operation “1” or the accessory operation “2”. The process which determines is performed. If it is determined that the game type is an accessory operation “1” or an accessory operation “2” (step S116-16-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-16-10. If it is determined that the game type is not the accessory operation “1” or the accessory operation “2” (step S116-16-9 = No), the process proceeds to step S116-16-11.

(Step S116-16-10)
In step S116-16-10, the main CPU 301 performs a bonus end process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the process, the main CPU 301 performs the process according to each counter flag at the end of the bonus operation “1” at the end of the bonus, or the instruction game “1” when in the second RT gaming state during BB. Processing to set, when the number of ART sets is set, processing for initial setting of ART, when the number of ART sets is not set, processing for normally setting “2” as the game type is performed. When the process of step S116-16-10 ends, the subroutine of the instruction game state management process “2-1” ends, and the process proceeds to step S116-17 of the game state transition process.

(Step S116-16-11)
In step S116-16-11, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is an accessory operation “3”. Specifically, in step S116-16-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is an accessory operation “3” as a result of performing the process of acquiring the game type. If it is determined that the game type is the accessory operation “3” (step S116-16-11 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-16-12, and the game type is the accessory operation “ If it is determined that it is not “3” (step S116-16-11 = No), the process proceeds to step S116-16-13.

(Step S116-16-12)
In step S116-16-12, the main CPU 301 performs a third stop-time article operation “3” time process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 sets the instruction game “4” as the game type at the end of the accessory operation “3”, or if the instruction game “5” has been acquired, “The remaining game counter is set. When the process of step S116-16-12 ends, the subroutine of the instruction game state management process “2-1” ends, and the process proceeds to step S116-17 of the game state transition process.

(Step S116-16-13)
In step S116-16-13, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is the designated game “1”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is the designated game “1” as a result of performing the process of acquiring the game type in step S116-16-1. If it is determined that the game type is the designated game “1” (step S116-16-13 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-16-14, and the game type is the designated game “1”. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S116-16-13 = No), the process proceeds to step S116-16-16.

(Step S116-16-14)
In step S116-16-14, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the RT gaming state is the third RT gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 refers to the gaming state storage area of the main RAM 303 and performs a process of determining whether or not the RT gaming state is the third RT gaming state. If it is determined that the RT gaming state is the third RT gaming state (step S116-16-14 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-16-15, and the RT gaming state is the third RT gaming state. If it is determined that it is not (step S116-16-14 = No), the subroutine of the instructed gaming state management process “2-1” is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S116-17 of the gaming state transition process. .

(Step S116-16-15)
In step S116-16-15, the main CPU 301 performs an ART initial setting process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting an instruction game “2” game number remaining counter, a process of setting an ART mode, a process of drawing an ART level, and the like. When the process of step S116-16-15 ends, the subroutine of the instruction game state management process “2-1” ends, and the process proceeds to step S116-17 of the game state transition process.

(Step S116-16-16)
In step S116-16-16, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is the designated game “2”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is the designated game “2” as a result of performing the process of acquiring the game type in step S116-16-1. If it is determined that the game type is the designated game “2” (step S116-16-16 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-16-17, and the game type is the designated game “2”. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S116-16-16 = No), the process proceeds to step S116-16-18.

(Step S116-16-17)
In step S116-16-17, the main CPU 301 performs an instruction game “2” end determination process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 obtains the instruction game “2” game number remaining counter, and when the instruction game “2” game number remaining counter is “0”, As the game type, processing for setting the continuous effect state is performed. When the process of step S116-16-17 ends, the subroutine of the instruction game state management process “2-1” ends, and the process proceeds to step S116-17 of the game state transition process.

(Step S116-16-18)
In step S116-16-18, the main CPU 301 performs an instruction game state management process “2-2” which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process according to the instruction game “4”, a process according to the instruction game “5”, a process according to the continuous effect state, and the like. When the process of step S116-16-18 is completed, the subroutine of the instruction game state management process “2-1” is ended, and the process proceeds to step S116-17 of the game state transition process.

(Instruction game state management process “2-2”)
Next, the instruction game state management process “2-2” performed by the process of step S116-16-18 of FIG. 55 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 56 shows a subroutine of the instruction game state management process “2-2”.

(Step S116-16-18-1)
In step S116-16-18-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is the designated game “4”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is the designated game “4” as a result of performing the process of acquiring the game type in step S116-16-1. If it is determined that the game type is the designated game “4” (step S116-16-18-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-16-18-2, and the game type is designated. If it is determined that the game is not “4” (step S116-16-18-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S116-16-18-3.

(Step S116-16-18-2)
In step S116-16-18-2, the main CPU 301 performs a third stop instruction game “4” time process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 obtains the instruction game “4” remaining game counter, and when the instruction game “4” remaining game counter is “0” and the instruction game “4” operation flag is ON. When the instruction game “4” remaining game counter is set to “10”, the instruction game “4” remaining game counter is “0”, and the instruction game “4” operation flag is not ON. The instruction game “5” remaining game counter is acquired, and if the instruction game “5” remaining game counter is “0”, the process of shifting to the ART initial setting process or the instruction game “5” remaining game counter is If it is not “0”, processing such as setting an instruction game “5” remaining game counter is performed. When the process of step S116-16-18-2 is completed, the subroutine of the instruction game state management process “2-2” is ended, and the process proceeds to step S116-17 of the game state transition process.

(Step S116-16-18-3)
In step S116-16-18-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is the designated game “5”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is the designated game “5” as a result of performing the process of acquiring the game type in step S116-16-1. If it is determined that the game type is the designated game “5” (step S116-16-18-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-16-18-4, and the game type is designated. If it is determined that the game is not “5” (step S116-16-18-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S116-16-18-5.

(Step S116-16-18-4)
In step S116-16-18-4, the main CPU 301 performs a third stop instruction game “5” time process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 obtains an instruction game “5” remaining game counter, and if the instruction game “5” remaining game counter is “0”, performs a process of shifting to an ART initial setting process. When the process of step S116-16-18-4 is completed, the subroutine of the instructed gaming state management process “2-2” is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S116-17 of the gaming state transition process.

(Step S116-16-18-5)
In step S116-16-18-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is the continuous effect state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is in the continuous effect state as a result of performing the process of acquiring the game type in step S116-16-1. If it is determined that the game type is the continuous effect state (step S116-16-18-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-16-18-6, and the game type is the continuous effect state. If it is determined that it is not (step S116-16-18-5 = No), the subroutine of the instructed gaming state management process “2-2” is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S116-17 of the gaming state transition process. Transition.

(Step S116-16-18-6)
In step S116-16-18-6, the main CPU 301 performs a third stop duration effect state process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 determines that the continuous effect state counter is “0”, and if the remaining ART set is not “0”, the main CPU 301 shifts to the ART initial setting process or the continuous effect state counter indicates “ If it is “0” and the remaining ART set is “0”, a process of normally setting “2” as the game type is performed. When the process of step S116-16-18-6 is completed, the subroutine of the instructed gaming state management process “2-2” is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S116-17 of the gaming state transition process.

(ART initial setting process)
Next, the ART initial setting process performed by the process of step S116-16-4 of FIG. 55 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the ART initial setting process. Since the ART initial setting process is a process that shifts from various processes, the reference numerals will be described using step S116-16-4 used in the instruction game state management process “2-1” for convenience.

(Step S116-16-4-1)
In step S116-16-4-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “40” to the instruction game “2” game number remaining counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “40” in the instruction game “2” game number remaining counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S116-16-4-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-16-4-2.

(Step S116-16-4-2)
In step S116-16-4-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the ART mode E in the register. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the ART mode E in the register as the ART mode which is a mode in the ART state. Then, when the process of step S116-16-4-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-16-4-3.

(Step S116-16-4-3)
In step S116-16-4-3, the main CPU 301 performs a winning combination acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a value stored in a winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303 and setting the value in a register. Then, when the process of step S116-16-4-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-16-4-4.

(Step S116-16-4-4)
In step S116-16-4-4, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the winning combination is premium replay. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether the winning combination is a premium replay based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303 acquired in step S116-16-4-3. The process which determines is performed. If it is determined that the winning combination is a premium replay (step S116-16-4-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-16-4-11, and the winning combination is not a premium replay. (Step S116-16-4-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S116-16-4-5.

(Step S116-16-4-5)
In step S116-16-4-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the instruction state flag is “2”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 refers to an instruction state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and performs a process of determining whether or not the instruction state flag is “2”. If it is determined that the instruction state flag is “2” (step S116-16-4-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-16-4-11, and the instruction state flag is “ If it is determined that it is not “2” (step S116-16-4-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S116-16-4-6.

(Step S116-16-4-6)
In step S116-16-4-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the instruction game lottery table “8”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of reading the instruction game lottery table “8” stored in the main ROM 302 and setting it in the register. Then, when the process of step S116-16-4-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-16-4-7.

(Step S116-16-4-7)
In step S116-16-4-7, the main CPU 301 performs setting value acquisition processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring a setting value stored in a setting value storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and setting it in a register. Then, when the process of step S116-16-4-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-16-4-8.

(Step S116-16-4-8)
In step S116-16-4-8, the main CPU 301 performs a hard random number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for extracting the random number value generated by the main random number generator 304 and processing for storing the extracted random number value in a register. Then, when the process of step S116-16-4-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-16-4-9.

(Step S116-16-4-9)
In step S116-16-4-9, the main CPU 301 performs an ART mode lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the ART mode A or the ART mode B based on the instruction game lottery table “8”, the set value stored in the set value storage area, and the extracted random number value. The lottery process of whether to be ART mode C, ART mode D, or ART mode E is performed. Then, when the process of step S116-16-4-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-16-4-10.

(Step S116-16-4-10)
In step S116-16-4-10, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a lottery result in a register. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the determined ART mode in the register as a result of performing the ART mode lottery processing in step S116-16-4-9. In step S116-16-4-2, since the ART mode E is set in the register, the ART mode determined in step S116-16-4-9 is overwritten on the ART mode E. Performs processing to set in the register. Then, when the process of step S116-16-4-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-16-4-11.

(Step S116-16-4-11)
In step S116-16-4-11, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the register value in the ART mode storage area. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a value corresponding to the ART mode set in the register in the ART mode storage area provided in the main RAM 303. For example, when the ART mode A is set in the register, a value corresponding to the ART mode A is set in the ART mode storage area, and when the ART mode E is set in the register, the ART mode E is set. The corresponding value is set in the ART mode storage area. Then, when the process of step S116-16-4-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-16-4-12.

  In other words, when premium replay is determined as the winning combination and ART initial setting processing is performed, the ART mode E set in the register in step S116-16-4-2 is set in the ART mode storage area. Become. When the instruction status flag is “2”, if “BB” is won and the process proceeds to the ART initial setting process after “BB” ends, the register is set in step S116-16-4-2. The ART mode E is set in the ART mode storage area. Therefore, in these cases, the “1” set in the ART state can be played in the ART mode E that is most advantageous to the player. As a result, when a premium replay is determined as a winning combination, or when “BB” is won when the instruction state flag is “2”, added value can be added, and the player's willingness to play can be increased. Can be aroused. Since the ART initial setting process is performed for each “1” set in the ART state, the ART mode stored in the ART mode storage area in the ART initial setting process is updated for each “1” set. It will be. Therefore, when premium replay is determined as a winning combination, or when “BB” is won when the instruction state flag is “2”, ART mode E is determined for the “1” set, After the “2” set, the ART mode is determined by lottery by the processing from step S116-16-4-6 to step S116-16-4-10. As a winning combination, when premium replay is decided, or when “BB” is won when the instruction state flag is “2”, the number of times of the ART mode E is “1” or more. Any number may be set as long as it exists.

(Step S116-16-4-12)
In step S116-16-4-12, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the instruction state flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the value of the instruction state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S116-16-4-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-16-4-13.

(Step S116-16-4-13)
In step S116-16-4-13, the main CPU 301 performs an ART level lottery process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 acquires the ART mode, and performs a process of determining the ART level based on the acquired ART mode, the instruction game lottery table “6”, and the extracted random number value. When the process of step S116-16-4-13 is completed, the ART initial setting process subroutine is ended, and the process returns to the transfer source process when the process proceeds to the ART initial setting process.

(ART level lottery process)
Next, the ART level lottery process performed by the process of step S116-16-4-13 of FIG. 57 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a subroutine of ART level lottery processing.

(Step S116-16-4-13-1)
In step S116-16-4-13-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the ART mode. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the ART mode stored in the ART mode storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and setting it in the register. Then, when the process of step S116-16-4-13-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-16-4-13-2.

(Step S116-16-4-13-2)
In step S116-16-4-13-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the instruction game lottery table “6”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 reads out the instruction game lottery table “6” stored in the main ROM 302 and sets it in the register. Then, when the process of step S116-16-4-13-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-16-4-13-3.

(Step S116-16-4-13-3)
In step S116-16-4-13-3, the main CPU 301 performs a hard random number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for extracting the random number value generated by the main random number generator 304 and processing for storing the extracted random number value in a register. Then, when the process of step S116-16-4-13-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-16-4-13-4.

(Step S116-16-4-13-4)
In step S116-16-4-13-4, the main CPU 301 performs an ART level lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the ART level to “LV1” or “LV2” based on the ART mode, the instruction game lottery table “6”, and the acquired random number value. The lottery process of “LV3” or “LV4” is performed. Then, when the process of step S116-16-4-13-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-16-4-13-5.

(Step S116-16-4-13-5)
In step S116-16-4-13-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the lottery result in the ART level storage area. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the ART level determined in step S116-16-4-13-4 in the ART level storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Since the ART level lottery process is also performed for each “1” set in the ART state, the ART level stored in the ART level storage area in the ART level lottery process is updated for each “1” set. It will be. When the process of step S116-16-4-13-5 is completed, the ART level lottery process subroutine is terminated, and the process returns to the transfer source process when the process shifts to the ART initial setting process.

(Bonus end processing)
Next, based on FIG. 59, the bonus end time process performed by the process of step S116-16-10 of FIG. 55 will be described. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a subroutine for bonus end processing.

(Step S116-16-10-1)
In step S116-16-10-1, the main CPU 301 performs a bonus medal payout number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the value of the payout number counter provided in the main RAM 303 and setting it in the register. Then, when the process of step S116-16-10-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-16-10-2.

(Step S116-16-10-2)
In step S116-16-10-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of payouts has exceeded “53”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the payout number counter exceeds “53” by determining whether or not the value of the payout number counter acquired in step S116-16-10-1 is “0”. Processing to determine whether or not. If it is determined that the number of payouts exceeds “53” (step S116-16-10-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-16-10-3, and the payout number is “53”. If it is determined that the number has not exceeded (step S116-16-10-2 = No), the bonus end process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S116-17 of the game state transition process. .

(Step S116-16-10-3)
In step S116-16-10-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a game type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 acquires a game type from a game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and performs a set process on the register. Then, when the process of step S116-16-10-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-16-10-4.

(Step S116-16-10-4)
In step S116-16-10-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is an accessory operation “1”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type is an accessory operation “1” as a result of performing the process of acquiring the game type in step S109-16-10-3. . If it is determined that the game type is the accessory operation “1” (step S116-16-10-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-16-10-5, and the game type is If it is determined that the action is not “1” (step S116-16-10-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S116-16-10-16.

(Step S116-16-10-5)
In step S116-16-10-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a normal ceiling number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the value of the normal ceiling number counter provided in the main RAM 303 and setting it in the register. Then, when the process of step S116-16-10-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-16-10-6.

(Step S116-16-10-6)
In step S116-16-10-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the normal ceiling number counter acquired in step S116-16-10-5 is greater than or equal to a predetermined value. Here, in the present embodiment, “778” is determined in advance as the predetermined value of the normal ceiling number counter. Accordingly, in this process, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal ceiling number counter is “778” or more. The normal ceiling number counter is “+1” for each game in the process of step S109-16-3 when the game type is normally “1” or normal “2”. In the normal state that normally constitutes “2”, if the game is performed “778” times without winning a bonus or ART state, it is determined that the value of the normal ceiling counter is greater than or equal to a predetermined value. become. If it is determined that the counter is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (step S116-16-10-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-16-10-7, and the counter is not equal to or greater than the predetermined value. Is determined (step S116-16-10-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S116-16-10-8.

(Step S116-16-10-7)
In step S116-16-10-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the first counter flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the first counter flag in the first counter flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Here, the “first counter flag” is a flag indicating that the normal ceiling number counter is greater than or equal to a predetermined value. In each counter flag confirmation process described later, if the “first counter flag” is ON. , The number of ART sets is incremented by “+1”. Then, when the process of step S116-16-10-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-16-10-8.

(Step S116-16-10-8)
In step S116-16-10-8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a bonus ART non-winning counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the value of the bonus ART non-winning counter provided in the main RAM 303 and setting the value in a register. Here, the “ART bonus non-winning counter” is a counter that is counted when the bonus is ended without winning the transition to the ART state, although the lottery for shifting to the ART state is performed during the bonus. It is. Then, when the process of step S116-16-10-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-16-10-9.

(Step S116-16-10-9)
In step S116-16-10-9, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the bonus ART non-winning counter acquired in step S116-16-10-8 is greater than or equal to a predetermined value. Here, in the present embodiment, “10” is predetermined as the predetermined value of the bonus ART non-winning counter. Therefore, in this process, it is determined whether or not the value of the bonus ART non-winning counter is “10” or more. Since the bonus ART non-winning counter is “+1” in the process of step S116-16-10-21 in the bonus end process, the lottery for shifting to the ART state was performed during the bonus. It is determined that the value of the bonus ART non-winning counter is greater than or equal to a predetermined value when the number of times the bonus is terminated without winning the lottery for transition to the state is “10”, that is, at the end of the “11th” bonus. Will be. If it is determined that the counter is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (step S116-16-10-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-16-10-10, and the counter is not equal to or greater than the predetermined value. Is determined (step S116-16-10-9 = No), the process proceeds to step S116-16-10-11.

(Step S116-16-10-10)
In step S116-16-10-10, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the second counter flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the second counter flag in the second counter flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Here, the “second counter flag” is a flag indicating that the bonus ART non-winning counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. In each counter flag confirmation process described later, the “second counter flag” is ON. In this case, the number of ART sets is “+1”. Then, when the process of step S116-16-10-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-16-10-11.

(Step S116-16-10-11)
In step S116-16-10-11, the main CPU 301 performs processing for obtaining a chance replay ceiling number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring the value of the chance replay ceiling number counter provided in the main RAM 303 and setting it in the register. Then, when the process of step S116-16-10-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-16-10-12.

(Step S116-16-10-12)
In step S116-16-10-12, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the chance replay ceiling number counter acquired in step S116-16-10-11 is “0”. The chance replay ceiling frequency is any one of “0” times, “5” times, “10” times, “25” times, “50” times, and “75” times as described in the explanation of FIG. Is set, and every time the chance replay is won, the counter is set to “−1”. That is, when the bonus is won when the chance replay ceiling number counter is “0”, it is determined that the counter is “0” in the bonus end process. If it is determined that the counter is “0” (step S116-16-10-12 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-16-10-13, and the counter is not “0”. (Step S116-16-10-12 = No), the process proceeds to step S116-16-10-15.

(Step S116-16-10-13)
In step S116-16-10-13, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the third counter flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the third counter flag in the third counter flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Here, the “third counter flag” is a flag indicating that the chance replay ceiling number counter is “0”. In each counter flag confirmation process described later, if the “third counter flag” is ON. , The number of ART sets is incremented by “+1”. Then, when the process of step S116-16-10-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-16-10-14.

(Step S116-16-10-14)
In step S116-16-10-14, the main CPU 301 performs a winning combination counter lottery process described with reference to FIG. In this processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a new number of chance replay ceilings in the normal state after the bonus ends. Then, when the process of step S116-16-10-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-16-10-15.

(Step S116-16-10-15)
In step S116-16-10-15, the main CPU 301 performs counter flag confirmation processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the first counter flag, the second counter flag, and the third counter flag are each ON. I do. Then, when the process of step S116-16-10-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-16-10-16.

(Step S116-16-10-16)
In step S116-16-10-16, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring an RT gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the RT gaming state stored in the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and setting it in the register. Then, when the process of step S116-16-10-16 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-16-10-17.

(Step S116-16-10-17)
In step S116-16-10-17, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the RT gaming state is the second RT gaming state during BB. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the RT gaming state acquired in step S116-16-10-16 is the second RT gaming state during BB. If it is determined that the RT gaming state is the second RT gaming state during BB (step S116-16-10-17 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-16-10-18, and RT gaming is performed. When it is determined that the state is not the second RT gaming state during BB (step S116-16-10-17 = No), the process proceeds to step S116-16-10-20.

(Step S116-16-10-18)
In step S116-16-10-18, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the designated game “1” as the game type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the designated game “1” in the game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Thus, when the BB is finished in the second RT gaming state during the BB without winning the RB during the BB, the instruction game “1” is set as the game type, and the number of ART sets is set to “+1”. Become. Then, when the process of step S116-16-10-18 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-16-10-19.

(Step S116-16-10-19)
In step S116-16-10-19, the main CPU 301 performs a process of incrementing the number of ART sets by “+1”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of “+1” the number of ART sets in the ART set number storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S116-16-10-19 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-16-10-20.

(Step S116-16-10-20)
In step S116-16-10-20, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of ART sets is set. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the ART set number is set in the ART set number storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the number of ART sets is set (step S116-16-10-20 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-16-10-23, and the number of ART sets is set. If it is determined that it is not (step S116-16-10-20 = No), the process proceeds to step S116-16-10-21.

(Step S116-16-10-21)
In step S116-16-10-21, the main CPU 301 performs a process of “+1” the bonus ART non-winning counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of “+1” a bonus ART non-winning counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S116-16-10-21 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-16-10-22.

(Step S116-16-10-22)
In step S116-16-10-22, the main CPU 301 performs a process of normally setting “2” as the game type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of normally setting “2” in the game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S116-16-10-22 is completed, the subroutine for the bonus end process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S116-17 of the gaming state transition process.

(Step S116-16-10-23)
In step S116-16-10-23, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the number of designated game “2” games at the time of winning the bonus. Here, when the bonus is won when the game type is the instruction game “2”, the main CPU 301 performs, for example, the instruction game provided in the main RAM 303 in the process during the instruction game “2” of FIG. “2” The value of the game number remaining counter is held. And the process of setting the value of the instruction game “2” game remaining counter held in the instruction game “2” game remaining counter is performed in this process. For example, if the value of the instruction game “2” game remaining counter is “10” and the bonus is won, the value “10” of the instruction game “2” game remaining counter is held, In this process, “10” is set in the instruction game “2” game number remaining counter. In other words, if the bonus is won when the designated game is “2”, after the bonus is over, the game is restarted from the number of games following the designated game “2”. However, since an exception occurs when the bonus for the action “3” is ended, the bonus for the action “2” is ended, and the designated game “4” is won, step S116- described later. This will be described in detail in 16-10-25. Then, when the process of step S116-16-10-23 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-16-10-24.

(Step S116-16-10-24)
In step S116-16-10-24, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the designated game “4” is won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the instruction game “4” is won based on whether or not the instruction game “4” transition flag is ON in the main RAM 303. . If it is determined that the designated game “4” is won (step S116-16-10-24 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-16-10-25, and the designated game “4” is selected. ”Is determined not to be won (step S116-16-10-24 = No), the bonus termination process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S116-17 of the gaming state transition process. .

(Step S116-16-10-25)
In step S116-16-10-25, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the game type to the designated game “4”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the designated game “4” in the game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. As a result, after completing the accessory operation “2”, the game moves to the instruction game “4”. When the process is shifted to this process, a process of clearing the value of the instruction game “2” game number remaining counter set in step S116-16-10-23 is performed. That is, when the instruction game “4” is entered, as shown in FIG. 63, the instruction game “5” is subsequently transferred, and as shown in FIG. 64, the instruction game “5” remaining game counter is set to “0”. Then, the ART initial setting process is performed. In the ART initial setting process, after the instruction game “2” game number remaining counter is set to “40”, the instruction game “2” is started. In other words, when the bonus for the bonus act “3” ends or when the bonus for the bonus act “2” ends and the designated game “4” is won, the game returns to the designated game “2” again. In this case, the instruction game “2” can be started from the first “40” game. On the other hand, when the bonus of the bonus game “2” is ended and the designated game “4” is not won, after the bonus of the bonus game “2” is finished, the game following the designated game “2” is played. It will restart from the number. Therefore, at the end of the bonus for the action item “3”, at the end of the bonus for the action item “2”, and when the instruction game “4” is won, the game returns to the instruction game “2”. Also, it has become a preferential treatment. When the process of step S116-16-10-25 is completed, the bonus end time subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S116-17 of the gaming state transition process.

(Each counter flag check process)
Next, based on FIG. 60, each counter flag confirmation process performed by the process of step S116-16-10-15 of FIG. 59 will be described. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a subroutine of each counter flag confirmation process.

(Step S116-16-10-15-1)
In step S116-16-10-15-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the first counter flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the first counter flag is ON in the first counter flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the first counter flag is ON (step S116-16-10-15-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-16-10-15-2, and the first If it is determined that the counter flag is not ON (step S116-16-10-15-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S116-16-10-15-4.

(Step S116-16-10-15-2)
In step S116-16-10-15-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of “+1” the number of ART sets. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of “+1” the number of ART sets in the ART set number storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S116-16-10-15-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-16-10-15-3.

(Step S116-16-10-15-3)
In step S116-16-10-15-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the first counter flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the first counter flag in the first counter flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S116-16-10-15-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-16-10-15-4.

(Step S116-16-10-15-4)
In step S116-16-10-15-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the second counter flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the second counter flag is ON in the second counter flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the second counter flag is ON (step S116-16-10-15-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-16-10-15-5, and the second If it is determined that the counter flag is not ON (step S116-16-10-15-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S116-16-10-15-7.

(Step S116-16-10-15-5)
In step S116-16-10-15-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of incrementing the number of ART sets by “+1”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of “+1” the number of ART sets in the ART set number storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S116-16-10-15-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-16-10-15-6.

(Step S116-16-10-15-6)
In step S116-16-10-15-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the second counter flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the second counter flag in the second counter flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S116-16-10-15-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-16-10-15-7.

(Step S116-16-10-15-7)
In step S116-16-10-15-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the third counter flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the third counter flag is ON in the third counter flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When it is determined that the third counter flag is ON (step S116-16-10-15-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-16-10-15-8, and the third counter If it is determined that the counter flag is not ON (steps S116-16-10-15-7 = No), each counter flag confirmation processing subroutine is terminated and step S116-16-10 of the bonus end processing is completed. The process is shifted to -16.

(Step S116-16-10-15-8)
In step S116-16-10-15-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of incrementing the number of ART sets by “+1”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of “+1” the number of ART sets in the ART set number storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S116-16-10-15-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-16-10-15-9.

(Step S116-16-10-15-9)
In step S116-16-10-15-9, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the third counter flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the third counter flag in the third counter flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S116-16-10-15-9 is completed, the subroutine of each counter flag confirmation process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S116-16-10-16 of the bonus end time process.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the condition that the transition to the ART state is confirmed after the end of the BB by winning one of the BBs is that (a) the normal ceiling number counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. BB winning, (b) BB winning when the bonus ART non-winning counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, and (c) BB winning when the chance replay ceiling number counter is “0” are determined according to individual conditions. If the number is cleared, “+1” is assigned to each ART set. Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the above conditions (a), (b), and (c) are cleared in duplicate, the number of ART sets that are redundantly cleared is given. Become. For example, when the transition from the BB to the ART state is not continued for “10” times and the next BB is the “11” th time, the “11th” BB is won after the “778” game in the normal state. If the chance replay ceiling counter is set to “0” before winning the BB, all the above conditions (a), (b), and (c) are satisfied, and the number of ART sets However, a total of “3” is given. Therefore, a larger privilege can be given compared with the case where each condition is cleared alone, and the player's willingness to play can be aroused. In addition, when all the conditions (a), (b), and (c) are satisfied, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given in addition to a total of “3” ART sets. You may make it do. For example, when performing the ART initial setting process, ART mode E that is most advantageous to the player may be given as the ART mode, or “LV4” that is most advantageous to the player is given as the ART level. You may do it. Also, a total of “5” ART sets may be added.

  Further, in the present embodiment, “778” is fixedly set as the predetermined value of the normal ceiling number counter, but the value set as the predetermined value may be variable. For example, when the set value is changed or at the end of the bonus, the value set as the predetermined value can be set to a variable value by configuring one of a plurality of values. It can be. Further, although “10” is fixedly set as the predetermined value of the bonus ART non-winning counter, the value set as the predetermined value may be variable. For example, when the set value is changed or at the end of the bonus, the value set as the predetermined value can be set to a variable value by configuring one of a plurality of values. It can be.

(Processing at the time of the 3rd stop operation of “3”)
Next, based on FIG. 61, the third stop-time accessory operation “3” process performed by the process of step S116-16-12 of FIG. 55 will be described. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the third stop-time accessory operation “3” process.

(Step S116-16-12-1)
In step S116-16-12-1, the main CPU 301 performs a bonus medal payout number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the value of the payout number counter provided in the main RAM 303 and setting it in the register. Then, when the process of step S116-16-12-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-16-12-2.

(Step S116-16-12-2)
In step S116-16-12-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not the number of payouts has exceeded “53”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the number of payouts has exceeded “53” by determining whether or not the value of the payout number counter acquired in step S116-16-12-1 is “0”. Processing to determine whether or not. If it is determined that the number of payouts exceeds “53” (step S116-16-12-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-16-12-3, and the payout number is “53”. If it is determined that the number does not exceed (step S116-16-12-2 = No), the subroutine for the third stop-time accessory operation “3” is ended, and the game state transition process step The process proceeds to S116-17.

(Step S116-16-12-3)
In step S116-16-12-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the designated game “4” as the game type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the designated game “4” in the game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S116-16-12-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-16-12-4.

(Step S116-16-12-4)
In step S116-16-12-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “10” to the instruction game “4” remaining game counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “10” to the instruction game “4” remaining game counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S116-16-12-4 is completed, the subroutine for the third stop-time item operation “3” process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S116-17 of the game state transition process.

  As described above, after the accessory operation “3” is ended, the instruction game “2” is not transferred, but the instruction game “4” is transferred. On the other hand, after completing the accessory operation “2”, as shown in the instruction game state management process “2-1” in FIG. 55 and the bonus end process in FIG. 59, the process shifts to the instruction game “2”. become. In addition, in the instruction game “4” and the instruction game “5” transferred from the instruction game “4”, a lottery for adding the set number of ART states constituting the instruction game “2” is performed. It is more advantageous to end the operation “3” and shift to the instruction game “4” than when the accessory operation “2” ends and the operation shifts to the instruction game “2”. Therefore, the player plays a game in a hope of shifting to the accessory operation “3” rather than shifting to the accessory operation “2”. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, when the bonus is won when the instruction game “4” is being performed, the accessory operation “3” operation flag is turned ON, and the accessory operation “3” is performed. Will be moved to. Further, as shown in FIG. 51, when the bonus is won while the instruction game “5” is being performed, the accessory operation “3” operation flag is turned ON, and the operation proceeds to the accessory operation “3”. Become. Then, as described with reference to FIG. 61, after completing the accessory operation “3”, the game moves to the instruction game “4” and the instruction game “4” can be played again. If the bonus game is won while the designated game “4” is being played, the value of the remaining game counter of the designated game “5” that has been acquired until the bonus is won is retained, and the transition is made again after the bonus is over. In the instruction game “4”, the stored instruction game “5” is stored in the form of addition to the value of the remaining game counter. Similarly, when the bonus game is won while the designated game “5” is being played, the number of ART sets acquired until the bonus is won is retained, and after the bonus is over, the designated game “4” is again played. In the instruction game “5” that has been transferred via, it is stored in the form of being added to the number of held ART sets. Therefore, in particular, when the bonus is won when the designated game “5” is being played, after the bonus game is played, the designated game “4” can be played again and the designated game “5” can be further played. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player from the viewpoint that opportunities for acquiring more ART sets are expanded.

(Instruction game “2” end determination process)
Next, based on FIG. 62, the instruction game “2” end determination process performed by the process of step S116-16-17 of FIG. 55 will be described. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the instruction game “2” end determination process.

(Step S116-16-17-1)
In step S116-16-17-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for obtaining an instruction game “2” game number remaining counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the value of the instruction game “2” game number remaining counter provided in the main RAM 303 and setting the value in the register. Then, when the process of step S116-16-17-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-16-17-2.

(Step S116-16-17-2)
In step S116-16-17-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the instruction game “2” game number remaining counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the instruction game “2” game number remaining counter acquired in step S116-16-17-1 is “0”. When it is determined that the instruction game “2” game number remaining counter is “0” (step S116-16-17-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-16-17-3. When the instruction game “2” game number remaining counter is determined not to be “0” (step S116-16-17-2 = No), the instruction game “2” end determination processing subroutine is terminated, The process proceeds to step S116-17 of the game state transition process.

(Step S116-16-17-3)
In step S116-16-17-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the number of remaining ART sets. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of “−1” the number of ART sets stored in the ART set number storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S116-16-17-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-16-17-4.

(Step S116-16-17-4)
In step S116-16-17-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the continuous effect state as the game type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a continuous effect state in a game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S116-16-17-4 is completed, the subroutine of the instruction game “2” end determination process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S116-17 of the game state transition process.

(Processing at the time of the third stop instruction game “4”)
Next, based on FIG. 63, the third stop instruction game “4” process performed by the process of step S116-16-18-2 of FIG. 56 will be described. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing at the time of the third stop instruction game “4”.

(Step S116-16-18-2-1)
In step S116-16-18-2-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for obtaining an instruction game “4” remaining game counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the value of the instruction game “4” remaining game counter provided in the main RAM 303 and setting the value in the register. Then, when the process of step S109-16-18-2-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-18-2-2.

(Step S116-16-18-2-2)
In step S <b> 116-16-18-2-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not the instruction game “4” remaining game counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the instruction game “4” remaining game counter acquired in step S116-16-18-2-1 is “0”. If it is determined that the instruction game “4” remaining game counter is “0” (step S116-16-18-2-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-16-18-2-3. , And when it is determined that the instruction game “4” remaining game counter is not “0” (step S116-16-18-2-2 = No), at the time of the third stop instruction game “4” The process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S116-17 of the game state transition process.

(Step S116-16-18-2-3)
In step S116-16-18-2-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the instruction game “4” operation flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the instruction game “4” operation flag is ON in the instruction game “4” operation flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the instruction game “4” operation flag is ON (step S116-16-18-2-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-16-18-2-4. If it is determined that the instruction game “4” operation flag is not ON (step S116-16-18-2-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S116-16-18-2-7.

(Step S116-16-18-2-4)
In step S116-16-18-2-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “10” to the instruction game “4” remaining game counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “10” to the instruction game “4” remaining game counter provided in the main RAM 303. In other words, if the instruction game “4” remaining game counter is “0” and the instruction game “4” operation flag is ON, “10” is newly set to the instruction game “4” remaining game counter. Will be. Then, when the process of step S116-16-18-2-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-16-18-2-5.

(Step S116-16-18-2-5)
In step S116-16-18-2-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the instruction game “4” operation flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of turning off the instruction game “4” operation flag in the instruction game “4” operation flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S116-16-18-2-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-16-18-2-6.

(Step S116-16-18-2-6)
In step S116-16-18-2-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of “+1” the instruction game “5” remaining game counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of “+1” the instruction game “5” remaining game counter provided in the main RAM 303. In other words, the lottery process of step S109-16-19-23-8-7 in the instruction game “4” process of FIG. 50 is won, and the instruction game “4” becomes the next “1” set, “10” game. In the case of shifting, the instruction game “5” remaining game counter is “+1” as a privilege. When the process of step S116-16-18-2-6 is completed, the subroutine for the third stop time instruction game “4” process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S116-17 of the game state transition process.

(Step S116-16-18-2-7)
In step S116-16-18-2-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the designated game “5” as the game type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the designated game “5” in the game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S116-16-18-2-7 is completed, the subroutine for the third stop time instruction game “4” process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S116-17 of the game state transition process.

(Processing at the time of the third stop instruction game “5”)
Next, based on FIG. 64, the third stop instruction game “5” process performed by the process of step S116-16-18-4 of FIG. 56 will be described. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the third stop instruction game “5” process.

(Step S116-16-18-4-1)
In step S116-16-18-4-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for obtaining an instruction game “5” remaining game counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the value of the instruction game “5” remaining game counter provided in the main RAM 303 and setting the value in the register. Then, when the process of step S116-16-18-4-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S116-16-18-4-2.

(Step S116-16-18-4-2)
In step S116-16-18-4-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not the instruction game “5” remaining game counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the instruction game “5” remaining game counter acquired in step S116-16-18-4-1 is “0”. If it is determined that the instruction game “5” remaining game counter is “0” (step S116-16-18-4-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-16-18-4-3. , And it is determined that the instruction game “5” remaining game counter is not “0” (step S116-16-18-4-2 = No), the third stop time instruction game is “5” The process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S116-17 of the game state transition process.

(Step S116-16-18-4-3)
In step S116-16-18-4-3, the main CPU 301 performs the ART initial setting process described in FIG. When the process of step S116-16-18-4-3 is completed, the subroutine for the third stop time instruction game “5” process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S116-17 of the game state transition process.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, the process for adding the number of ART sets is performed until the instruction game “5” remaining game counter reaches “0”. For example, even if the designated game “5” remaining game counter is “3” and the lottery for adding the number of ART sets is won in the first game, the designated game “5” is not ended and the remaining “2” continues. For the game, a process for adding the number of ART sets is performed. Therefore, since a lottery for adding the number of ART sets to the value set in the instruction game “5” remaining game counter can be received, the larger the instruction game “5” remaining game counter, the more ART sets. As the number of instructed game “5” remaining game counters increases, the player's gaming interests can be improved.

(Third stop continuation effect state processing)
Next, based on FIG. 65, the 3rd stop time continuous presentation state process performed by the process of step S116-16-18-6 of FIG. 56 is demonstrated. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the third stop time continuous effect state process.

(Step S116-16-18-6-1)
In step S116-16-18-6-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the continuous effect state counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 acquires the value of the continuous effect state counter provided in the main RAM 303 and performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the continuous effect state counter is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the continuous effect state counter is “0” (step S116-16-18-6-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-16-18-6-2. When it is determined that the value of the counter effect state counter is not “0” (step S116-16-18-6-1 = No), the third stop time continuous effect state process subroutine is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to step S116-17 of the game state transition process.

(Step S116-16-18-6-2)
In step S116-16-18-6-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the number of remaining ART sets is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 refers to the ART set number storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and performs a process of determining whether or not the remaining ART set number is “0”. If it is determined that the number of remaining ART sets is “0” (step S116-16-18-6-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-16-18-6-4. If it is determined that the number of remaining ART sets is not “0” (step S116-16-18-6-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S116-16-18-6-3.

(Step S116-16-18-6-3)
In step S116-16-18-6-3, the main CPU 301 performs the ART initial setting process described in FIG. Then, when the process of step S116-16-18-6-3 is completed, the subroutine for the third stop duration effect state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S116-17 of the game state transition process.

(Step S116-16-18-6-4)
In step S116-16-18-6-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for normally setting “2” as the game type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of normally setting “2” in the game type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S116-16-18-6-4 is completed, the subroutine for the third stop duration effect state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S116-17 of the game state transition process.

(Interrupt processing)
Next, interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the interrupt process is a process performed by interrupting the main loop process every “2.233 ms”.

(Step S201)
In step S <b> 201, the main CPU 301 performs processing for saving a register. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for saving the value of the register used at the time of step S201. Then, when the process of step S201 ends, the process proceeds to step S202.

(Step S202)
In step S202, the main CPU 301 performs input port read processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for receiving various signals from the status board 100, the reel control board 150, and the power supply board 200. Then, when the process of step S202 ends, the process proceeds to step S203.

(Step S203)
In step S203, the main CPU 301 performs timer measurement processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the timer counter for measuring the minimum game time and the like. Then, when the process of step S203 ends, the process proceeds to step S204.

(Step S204)
In step S204, the main CPU 301 performs a reel drive control process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets “3” corresponding to the right reel 20 as the initial value of the reel number, and drives the right stepping motor 153 corresponding to the reel number “3”, thereby Rotation acceleration, constant speed, deceleration control, etc. are performed. Next, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the reel number, and drives the intermediate stepping motor 152 corresponding to the reel number “2”, thereby controlling the acceleration, constant speed, and deceleration of the rotation of the intermediate reel 19. Etc. Next, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the reel number and drives the left stepping motor 151 corresponding to the reel number “1”, thereby controlling the acceleration, constant speed, and deceleration of the rotation of the left reel 18. Etc. Then, when the process of step S204 ends, the process proceeds to step S205.

(Step S205)
In step S205, the main CPU 301 performs external signal output processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting output port data of the external concentration terminal board 30 and the like. Then, when the process of step S205 ends, the process proceeds to step S206.

(Step S206)
In step S206, the main CPU 301 performs an LED display process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing for creating display data of the stored number display unit 15 and the payout number display unit 16. Then, when the process of step S206 ends, the process proceeds to step S207.

(Step S207)
In step S207, the main CPU 301 performs control command transmission processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for transmitting a command set in an effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 to the sub-control board 400. Then, when the process of step S207 ends, the process proceeds to step S208.

(Step S208)
In step S208, the main CPU 301 performs port output processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing of transmitting various signals to the status board 100, the reel control board 150, the power supply board 200, and the sub control board 400. Then, when the process of step S208 ends, the process proceeds to step S209.

(Step S209)
In step S209, the main CPU 301 performs a register restoration process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of restoring the saved register value in the process of step S201. Then, when the process of step S209 ends, the interrupt process ends, and the process returns to the main loop process.

(LED display processing)
Next, based on FIG. 67, the LED display process performed by the process of step S206 of FIG. 66 will be described. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a subroutine of LED display processing.

(Step S206-1)
In step S <b> 206-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is time to create stored number indicator data. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is time to create stored number display data for turning on or off the stored number display 15. Here, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 detects that the selector sensor 14 s has inserted a medal into the medal slot 6 and adds the value of the stored number counter provided in the main RAM 303. When the symbol combination for winning is displayed on the active line and the value of the stored number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is added, the lever switch 7sw detects the operation of the BET lever 7 and is provided in the main RAM 303. When the stored number counter value is subtracted, when the MAXBET switch 8sw detects the operation of the MAXBET button 8 and subtracts the stored number counter value provided in the main RAM 303, the stored number indicator data is generated. The process which determines that it is is performed. When it is determined that the stored number display data is being created (step S206-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S206-2, and it is determined that the stored number display data is not being created. In that case (step S206-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S206-3.

(Step S206-2)
In step S206-2, the main CPU 301 performs LED data creation processing for the stored number indicator. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for creating stored number display data for turning on or off the LED of the stored number display 15. Then, when the process of step S206-2 ends, the LED display process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to interrupt process step S207.

(Step S206-3)
In step S <b> 206-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not it is time to create payout number display data. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is time to create payout number display data for turning on or off the payout number display 16. Here, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 displays an instruction in the instruction information display LED data creation flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 when the “combination of winning symbols” is displayed on the active line. When the information display LED data creation flag is ON and it is time to notify the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, it is determined that the payout number display data is being created. Process. If it is determined that the payout number display data is being created (step S206-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S206-4, and it is determined that the payout number display data is not being generated. In that case (step S206-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S206-6.

(Step S206-4)
In step S206-4, the main CPU 301 performs an instruction information display LED data creation process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of creating payout number display data for turning on / off the LED of the payout number display 16 on the basis of the presence / absence of the creation request of the instruction information display LED data. Then, when the process of step S206-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S206-5.

(Step S206-5)
In step S206-5, the main CPU 301 performs a payout number display LED data creation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 creates payout number display LED data for displaying the payout number on the payout number display 16 when the “combination of symbols related to winning” is displayed on the active line. Process. When the process of step S206-5 ends, the LED display process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S207 of the interrupt process.

(Step S206-6)
In step S206-6, the main CPU 301 performs various LED data creation processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 creates replay display LED data for lighting a replay display lamp (not shown) that is turned on when the “replay symbol combination” is displayed on the active line. Processing and start lamp LED data creation processing for lighting a start lamp (not shown) that is turned on when the operation of the start lever 10 is effective are performed. When the process of step S206-6 ends, the LED display process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to interrupt process step S207.

(Instruction information display LED data creation process)
Next, the instruction information display LED data creation process performed by the process of step S206-4 of FIG. 67 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a subroutine of instruction information display LED data creation processing.

(Step S206-4-1)
In step S <b> 206-4-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not there is an instruction information display LED data creation request. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not there is an instruction information display LED data creation request based on whether or not the instruction information display LED data creation request flag is stored in the main RAM 303. I do. If the instruction information display LED data creation request flag is stored, the stored instruction type (instruction content) is acquired separately. If it is determined that there is an instruction information display LED data creation request (step S206-4-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S206-4-2, and the instruction information display LED data creation request is made. If it is determined that there is no (step S206-4-1 = No), the instruction information display LED data creation process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S206-5 of the LED display process.

(Step S206-4-2)
In step S206-4-2, the main CPU 301 performs an instruction information display LED data creation process. Specifically, when the instruction information display LED data creation request flag is stored in step S206-4-1, the main CPU 301 displays instruction information corresponding to the separately acquired instruction type (instruction content). A process for creating the LED data for use is performed. The instruction information display LED data created in this process is transmitted to the status board 100 in the port output process in step S208 of the interrupt process. When the process of step S206-4-2 ends, the instruction information display LED data creation process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S206-5 of the LED display process.

(Main processing on sub-control board)
Next, the main process in the sub control board will be described with reference to FIG.

(Step S301)
In step S301, the sub CPU 401 performs an initialization process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for checking an error in the sub RAM 403 and the like. Then, when the process of step S301 ends, the process proceeds to step S302.

(Step S302)
In step S302, the sub CPU 401 performs main control board communication processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for analyzing a command received from the main control board 300 and the like. Then, when the process of step S302 ends, the process proceeds to step S303.

(Step S303)
In step S303, the sub CPU 401 performs sound control processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of outputting sound from the speaker 33 based on the sound data determined by the sound data determination process in step S302-3-20-7 described later. Then, when the process of step S303 ends, the process proceeds to step S304.

(Step S304)
In step S304, the sub CPU 401 performs LED control processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 controls the LED 32 based on the LED data determined by the LED data determination process in step S302-3-20-6 described later. Then, when the process of step S304 ends, the process proceeds to step S305.

(Step S305)
In step S305, the sub CPU 401 performs image control processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 controls the liquid crystal display device 31 based on the image data determined by the image data determination process in step S302-3-20-8 described later. Then, when the process of step S305 ends, the process proceeds to step S306.

(Step S306)
In step S306, the sub CPU 401 performs various switch detection processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of executing a predetermined process when the effect button sensor 21s detects an operation of the effect button 21 or when the cross key sensor 22s detects an operation of the cross key 22. Then, when the process of step S306 ends, the process proceeds to step S302.

(Main control board communication processing)
Next, the main control board communication process performed by the process of step S302 of FIG. 69 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a subroutine of main control board communication processing.

(Step S302-1)
In step S302-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a different command is received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the command received from the main control board 300 is a command different from the command received last time. If it is determined that a different command has been received (step S302-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-2. If it is determined that a different command has not been received (step S302). -1 = No), the main control board communication process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Step S302-2)
In step S302-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a game information storage process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for creating game information based on a command different from the previously transmitted command and storing it in a predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3.

(Step S302-3)
In step S302-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a command analysis process that will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 401 executes a process based on the game information stored by the process of step S302-2. When the process of step S302-3 ends, the main control board communication process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the command analysis process performed by the process of step S302-3 of FIG. 70 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a subroutine of command analysis processing.

(Step S302-3-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the sub command “1” has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the sub command “1” is received from the main control board 300 by the main control board communication process of FIG. If it is determined that the subcommand “1” has been received (step S302-3-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-2, and the subcommand “1” has not been received. Is determined (step S302-3-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-5.

(Step S302-3-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not it is RT type information. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the RT type information is included in the information included in the sub command “1”. If it is determined that the information is RT type information (step S302-3-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-3. If it is determined that the information is not RT type information ( Step S302-3-2 = No) and the process proceeds to step S302-3-4.

(Step S302-3-3)
In step S302-3-3, the sub CPU 401 performs sub-side RT information update processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 updates the value of the sub-side RT information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 when receiving the RT type information of the sub command “1” transmitted from the main control board 300. Perform the process. As a result, the type of RT gaming state controlled by the main control board 300 can be recognized. Then, when the process of step S302-3-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-20.

(Step S302-3-4)
In step S <b> 302-3-4, the sub CPU 401 performs other sub-command “1” reception processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing when information other than the RT type information among the information included in the sub command “1” is received. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-20.

(Step S302-3-5)
In step S302-3-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the sub command “2” has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the sub command “2” is received from the main control board 300 by the main control board communication process of FIG. If it is determined that the subcommand “2” has been received (step S302-3-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6, and the subcommand “2” has not been received. (Step S302-3-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-15.

(Step S302-3-6)
In step S302-3-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether the information is chance replay counter information. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the chance replay counter information is included in the information included in the sub command “2”. When it is determined that the information is the chance replay counter information (step S302-3-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-7, and when it is determined that the information is not the chance replay counter information. (Step S302-3-6 = No), the process proceeds to Step S302-3-8.

(Step S302-3-7)
In step S302-3-7, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for updating the sub-side chance replay counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 updates the sub-side chance replay counter provided in the sub RAM 403 when receiving the chance replay counter information in the sub-command “2” transmitted from the main control board 300. I do. Thereby, the value of the chance replay counter counted by the main control board 300 can be recognized. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-8.

(Step S302-3-8)
In step S302-3-8, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the instruction state flag information is present. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the instruction state flag information is included in the information included in the sub command “2”. If it is determined that the information is instruction state flag information (step S302-3-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-9, and if it is determined that the instruction state flag information is not included. (Step S302-3-8 = No), the process proceeds to Step S302-3-10.

(Step S302-3-9)
In step S302-3-9, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for updating the sub-side instruction state flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 updates the sub instruction state flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 when receiving the instruction state flag information of the sub command “2” transmitted from the main control board 300. Perform the process. Thereby, the value of the instruction state flag controlled by the main control board 300 can be recognized. Then, when the process of step S302-3-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-10.

(Step S302-3-10)
In step S302-3-10, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not it is ART mode information. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the ART mode information is included in the information included in the sub command “2”. If it is determined that the information is ART mode information (step S302-3-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-11. If it is determined that the information is not ART mode information ( In step S302-3-10 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12.

(Step S302-3-11)
In step S302-3-11, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for updating the sub-side ART mode. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 updates the sub-side ART mode information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 when receiving the ART mode information of the subcommand “2” transmitted from the main control board 300. Process. Thereby, the ART mode controlled by the main control board 300 can be recognized. Then, when the process of step S302-3-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12.

(Step S302-3-12)
In step S302-3-12, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type information. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the game type information is included in the information included in the sub command “2”. If it is determined that the game type information is determined (step S302-3-12 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-13. If it is determined that the type is not game type information ( In step S302-3-12 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-14.

(Step S302-3-13)
In step S302-3-13, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for updating the sub game type. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 updates the sub-side game type information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 when receiving the game type information of the sub-command “2” transmitted from the main control board 300. Process. Thereby, the game type controlled by the main control board 300 can be recognized. Then, when the process of step S302-3-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-14.

(Step S302-3-14)
In step S302-3-14, the sub CPU 401 performs processing upon reception of another subcommand “2”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing when information other than the chance replay counter information, the instruction state flag information, the ART mode information, and the game type information among the information included in the sub command “2” is received. Then, when the process of step S302-3-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-20.

(Step S302-3-15)
In step S302-3-15, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a conditional device command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not a conditional device command has been received from the main control board 300 by the main control board communication process of FIG. If it is determined that the conditional device command has been received (step S302-3-15 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-16, and it is determined that the conditional device command has not been received. In this case (step S302-3-15 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-19.

(Step S302-3-16)
In step S302-3-16, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the conditional device command corresponds to any one of “BB01” to “BB03”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the conditional device command received in step S302-3-15 corresponds to one of “BB01” to “BB03”. If it is determined that any of “BB01” to “BB03” is satisfied (step S302-3-16 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-17, and “BB01” to “BB03”. When it is determined that any of the above does not correspond (step S302-3-16 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-18.

(Step S302-3-17)
In step S302-3-17, the sub CPU 401 performs a BB command reception process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 401 designates the execution of the special continuous effect if the special continuous effect is executable, or if the sub-side chance replay counter is “0”, the sub CPU 401 sets “BB” as the special BB effect. For example, if the sub-instruction status flag is “2”, a process for specifying a special BB effect reservation to make “BB” a special BB effect, When the sub-side chance replay counter is not “0” and the sub-side instruction state flag is not “2”, a process for designating a normal BB effect reservation is performed in order to set “BB” as a normal BB effect. Then, when the process of step S302-3-17 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-20.

(Step S302-3-18)
In step S302-3-18, the sub CPU 401 performs other conditional device command reception processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing when a conditional device command other than “BB01” to “BB03” is received. Then, when the process of step S302-3-18 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-20.

(Step S302-3-19)
In step S302-3-19, the sub CPU 401 performs other command reception processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 401 receives the display determination command, determines that the special effect reservation is specified when it is determined that the bonus symbol is displayed, and if the special effect reservation is specified, A process for executing a normal BB effect as an effect of “BB” or a process when receiving an instruction information command when a special BB effect is executed as an effect of “BB” and no special effect reservation is specified. Etc. Then, when the process of step S302-3-19 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-20.

(Step S302-3-20)
In step S302-3-20, the sub CPU 401 performs an effect related process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, when execution of the special continuous effect is designated, the sub CPU 401 determines the process of determining the execution of the special continuous effect, the process of determining the LED data, the process of determining the sound data, Processing to determine data is performed. When the process of step S302-3-20 ends, the command analysis process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Process when receiving BB command)
Next, based on FIG. 72, the process at the time of BB command reception performed by the process of step S302-3-17 of FIG. 71 will be described. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing when a BB command is received.

(Step S302-3-17-1)
In step S302-3-17-1, the sub CPU 401 performs sub-side game type acquisition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for acquiring the sub game type from the sub game type information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 and setting it in the sub register. Then, when the process of step S302-3-17-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-17-2.

(Step S302-3-17-2)
In step S302-3-17-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the sub game type is normally “1” or “2”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the sub-side game type acquired in step S302-3-17-1 is normally “1” or normally “2”. . If it is determined that the sub-side game type is normal “1” or normal “2” (step S302-3-17-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-17-3. , And when it is determined that the sub-side game type is neither normal “1” nor normal “2” (step S302-3-17-2 = No), step S302-3-17 The process is shifted to -6.

(Step S302-3-17-3)
In step S302-3-17-3, the sub CPU 401 performs sub-side RT information acquisition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for acquiring the sub side RT information from the sub side RT information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 and setting the sub side RT information in the sub side register. Then, when the process of step S302-3-17-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-17-4.

(Step S302-3-17-4)
In step S302-3-17-4, the sub CPU 401 determines whether the sub-side RT information is “third RT gaming state”, “fourth RT gaming state”, or “fifth RT gaming state”. Perform the process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether the sub-side RT information acquired in step S302-3-17-3 is “third RT gaming state”, “fourth RT gaming state”, or “fifth RT gaming state”. The process which determines whether it is is performed. Then, when it is determined that the sub-side RT information is either “third RT gaming state”, “fourth RT gaming state”, or “fifth RT gaming state” (step S302-3-17-4). = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-17-5, and the sub-side RT information is not “third RT gaming state”, “fourth RT gaming state”, or “fifth RT gaming state”. If it is determined (step S302-3-17-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-17-6.

(Step S302-3-17-5)
In step S302-3-17-5, the sub CPU 401 designates execution of a special continuous effect. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 has a sub game type of “1” or “2”, and the sub RT information is “third RT game state” or “fourth RT game state”, or When the BB command is received in any of the “fifth RT gaming state”, processing for designating execution of the special continuous effect is performed in order to execute the special continuous effect. For example, a special continuous effect execution flag is stored in the sub RAM 403, and the special continuous effect is determined when the flag is stored in an effect-related process described later. Thereby, the sub-side game type is normally “1” or normal “2”, and the sub-side RT information is “third RT gaming state”, “fourth RT gaming state”, or “fifth RT gaming state”. When the BB command is received at any of the above, a special continuous effect is executed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-17-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-17-6.

  It should be noted that a situation in which “1” or “2” is normal and the state is either “3rd RT gaming state”, “4th RT gaming state”, or “5th RT gaming state” means that the BB has ended. From the time (for example, “3rd RT gaming state”) to when the state transition replay is displayed and before shifting to the “first RT gaming state”, or when the ART state is terminated (for example, “3rd RT gaming state”) ) Until the state transition replay is displayed and the state transitions to the “first RT gaming state”. In such a situation, when the sub CPU 401 wins the BB, the sub CPU 401 selects the special continuous effect as an effect for notifying that the BB has been won. In other words, in such a situation, when the special continuous effect is executed, the BB winning is determined. Thereby, by executing the special continuous performance, it is possible to grasp that BB is won, and it is possible to play the game while requesting the generation of the special continuous performance.

(Step S302-3-17-6)
In step S302-3-17-6, the sub CPU 401 performs sub-side chance replay counter acquisition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for obtaining the value of the sub-side chance replay counter from the sub-side chance replay counter provided in the sub RAM 403 and setting it in the sub-side register. Then, when the process of step S302-3-17-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-17-7.

(Step S302-3-17-7)
In step S302-3-17-7, the sub CPU 401 performs sub-side instruction state flag acquisition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for acquiring the value of the sub instruction state flag from the sub instruction state flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 and setting it in the sub register. Then, when the process of step S302-3-17-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-17-8.

(Step S302-3-17-8)
In step S302-3-17-8, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the sub-side chance replay counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the sub-side chance replay counter acquired in step S302-3-17-6 is “0”. If it is determined that the sub-side chance replay counter is “0” (step S302-3-17-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-17-11, and the sub-side chance is determined. If it is determined that the replay counter is not “0” (step S302-3-17-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-17-9.

(Step S302-3-17-9)
In step S302-3-17-9, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the sub-side instruction state flag is “2”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the sub instruction state flag acquired in step S302-3-17-7 is “2”. When it is determined that the sub-side instruction state flag is “2” (step S302-3-17-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-17-11, and the sub-side instruction is performed. If it is determined that the status flag is not “2” (step S302-3-17-9 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-17-10.

(Step S302-3-17-10)
In step S302-3-17-10, the sub CPU 401 performs normal BB effect reservation designation. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning on the normal BB effect execution flag in the sub RAM 403 in order to execute the normal BB effect as an effect during the execution of the BB. The “normal BB effect” is a BB effect that is executed when the transition to the ART state is not confirmed when the BB is started. The “normal BB effect execution flag” is a flag for recognizing that the “normal BB effect” is executed as the BB effect. Then, when the process of step S302-3-17-10 ends, the subroutine of the BB command reception process ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-20 of the command analysis process.

(Step S302-3-17-11)
In step S302-3-17-11, the sub CPU 401 performs special BB effect reservation designation. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of turning on a special BB effect execution flag in the sub RAM 403 in order to execute a special BB effect as an effect during BB execution. The “special BB effect” means that when the BB is started with the chance replay counter being “0”, or when the BB is started with the instruction state flag being “2”, the state shifts to the ART state after the end of the BB. This is a BB effect that is executed in order to notify this fact. The “special BB effect execution flag” is a flag for recognizing that the “special BB effect” is executed as the BB effect. When the process of step S302-3-17-11 ends, the subroutine of the BB command reception process ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-20 of the command analysis process.

(Other command reception processing)
Next, based on FIG. 73, the other command reception process performed by the process of step S302-3-19 of FIG. 71 will be described. FIG. 73 shows a subroutine for other command reception processing.

(Step S302-3-19-1)
In step S302-3-19-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a display determination command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not a display determination command is received from the main control board 300 by the main control board communication process of FIG. If it is determined that the display determination command has been received (step S302-3-19-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-19-2, and the display determination command has not been received. (Step S302-3-19-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-19-8.

(Step S302-3-19-2)
In step S302-3-19-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a bonus symbol is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a bonus symbol is displayed based on the display determination command received in step S302-3-19-1. Note that the bonus symbol in the process is a combination of symbols relating to “BB01” to “BB03”. If it is determined that the bonus symbol is displayed (step S302-3-19-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-19-3, and it is determined that the bonus symbol is not displayed. If so (step S302-3-19-2 = No), the other command reception processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-20 of the command analysis process.

(Step S302-3-19-3)
In step S302-3-19-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a special BB effect reservation is designated. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the special BB effect reservation is designated in the sub RAM 403 based on whether or not the special BB effect execution flag is ON. If it is determined that the special BB effect reservation is designated (step S302-3-19-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-19-4, and the special BB effect reservation is made. If it is determined that it has not been specified (step S302-3-19-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-19-6.

(Step S302-3-19-4)
In step S302-3-19-4, the sub CPU 401 performs special BB effect execution determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining execution of the special BB effect as the BB effect. Then, when the process of step S302-3-19-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-19-5.

(Step S302-3-19-5)
In step S302-3-19-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for clearing the special BB effect reservation. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for clearing the special BB effect reservation in the sub RAM 403 by turning off the special BB effect execution flag. When the process of step S302-3-19-5 ends, the other command reception process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-20 of the command analysis process.

(Step S302-3-19-6)
In step S302-3-19-6, the sub CPU 401 performs a normal BB effect execution determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining execution of the normal BB effect as the BB effect. Then, when the process of step S302-3-19-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-19-7.

(Step S302-3-19-7)
In step S302-3-19-7, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for clearing the normal BB effect reservation. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of clearing the normal BB effect reservation by turning off the normal BB effect execution flag in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-19-7 ends, the other command reception processing subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-20 of the command analysis process.

(Step S302-3-19-8)
In step S302-3-19-8, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not an instruction information command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not an instruction information command has been received from the main control board 300 by the main control board communication process of FIG. If it is determined that the instruction information command has been received (step S302-3-19-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-19-9, and the instruction information command has not been received. Is determined (step S302-3-19-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-19-10.

(Step S302-3-19-9)
In step S302-3-19-9, the sub CPU 401 performs instruction information command reception processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for displaying operation information on the liquid crystal display device 31 via the effect control board 500 based on the instruction content specified by the instruction information command. For example, if the instruction content specified by the instruction information command is “123”, a process for displaying the operation information “123” on the liquid crystal display device 31 via the effect control board 500 is performed. If the instruction content specified by the instruction information command is “no instruction”, the contents indicating “no instruction” may or may not be transmitted to the effect control board 500. Good. In any case, if the instruction content specified by the instruction information command is “no instruction”, the operation information is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31. When the process of step S302-3-19-9 ends, the other command reception subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-20 of the command analysis process.

(Step S302-3-19-10)
In step S302-3-19-10, the sub CPU 401 performs other command reception processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing when a command other than the sub command “1”, the sub command “2”, the conditional device command, the display determination command, and the instruction information command is received. When the process of step S302-3-19-10 ends, the subroutine for other command reception processing ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-20 of the command analysis process.

(Direction-related processing)
Next, based on FIG. 74, the effect related process performed by the process of step S302-3-20 of FIG. 71 will be described. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a subroutine of effect related processing.

(Step S302-3-20-1)
In step S302-3-20-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not execution of the BB effect is determined. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not execution of the special BB effect or the normal BB effect is determined in the other command reception process of FIG. If it is determined that the execution of the BB effect is determined (step S302-3-20-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-20-6, and the execution of the BB effect is performed. If it is determined that it has not been determined (step S302-3-20-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-20-2.

(Step S302-3-20-2)
In step S302-3-20-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a special continuous effect execution designation. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not there is a special continuous effect execution designation based on whether or not a special continuous effect execution flag is stored in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that there is a special continuous production execution designation (step S302-3-20-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-20-3, and there is no special continuous production execution designation. Is determined (step S302-3-20-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-20-5.

(Step S302-3-20-3)
In step S302-3-20-3, the sub CPU 401 performs special continuous effect determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the execution of the special continuous effect when the execution of the special continuous effect is designated. Then, when the process of step S302-3-20-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-20-4.

(Step S302-3-20-4)
In step S302-3-20-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for clearing the special continuous performance execution designation. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the special continuous effect execution flag in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-20-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-20-6.

(Step S302-3-20-5)
In step S302-3-20-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a sub effect determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 specifies the state managed by the main control board 300 based on the command received by the main control board 300, and uses the effect determination table (see FIG. 76) provided in the sub ROM 402. Perform processing to select. Then, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining an effect executed by the liquid crystal display device 31 or the like based on the selected effect determination table. Then, when the process of step S302-3-20-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-20-6.

(Step S302-3-20-6)
In step S302-3-20-6, the sub CPU 401 performs LED data determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining LED data corresponding to the effect determined by the sub effect determination process in step S302-3-20-5. For example, when execution of the BB effect is determined, LED data corresponding to the determined BB effect is determined, and when execution of the special continuous effect is determined, it corresponds to the special continuous effect. Determine the LED data. Then, when the process of step S302-3-20-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-20-7.

(Step S302-3-20-7)
In step S302-3-20-7, the sub CPU 401 performs sound data determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining sound data corresponding to the effect determined by the sub effect determining process in step S302-3-20-5. For example, when execution of the BB effect is determined, sound data corresponding to the determined BB effect is determined, and when execution of the special continuous effect is determined, it corresponds to the special continuous effect. Determine the sound data. Then, when the process of step S302-3-20-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-20-8.

(Step S302-3-20-8)
In step S302-3-20-8, the sub CPU 401 performs image data determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining image data corresponding to the effect determined by the sub effect determining process in step S302-3-20-5. For example, when execution of the BB effect is determined, image data corresponding to the determined BB effect is determined, and when execution of the special continuous effect is determined, it corresponds to the special continuous effect. Determine the image data. Then, when the process of step S302-3-20-8 is completed, the effect-related process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Figure showing production definition in special BB state)
Next, based on FIG. 75, the effect definition in the “special BB effect” in the present embodiment will be described.

  First, FIG. 75 (a) shows a list of effects during the special BB state. The effects executed during the special BB state are the episode “1” bonus effect, the episode “2” bonus effect, and the episode “3”. “Bonus production, episode“ 4 ”bonus production, and episode“ 5 ”bonus production are defined. Then, any one of these “5” types of effects is executed, and the player moves to the ART state after BB ends by executing these effects together with the start of BB. I can understand that.

  Next, in FIG. 75 (b), the relationship between the trigger for executing the “special BB effect” and the effect to be selected is defined. First, if the bonus is won when the above-described instruction state flag is “0” or “1” and the chance replay ceiling number counter is “0”, the episode “1” bonus effect, the episode “2” Any one of the bonus effect, the episode “3” bonus effect, and the episode “4” bonus effect is executed. Note that which effect is to be executed is determined by, for example, the special BB effect execution determination process in step S302-3-19-4 in FIG. 73, along with the execution of the special BB effect, the episode “1” bonus effect, and the episode “2”. It can be determined whether to execute any one of “bonus effect”, episode “3” bonus effect, and episode “4” bonus effect. In the determination, for example, a predetermined random value can be extracted from the sub-random number generator 404 to determine which effect is to be used.

  On the other hand, when the bonus is won when the above-described instruction state flag is “2”, only the episode “5” bonus effect is selected. In other words, the episode “5” bonus effect is executed at the start of the BB, so that the player understands that the mode in the “normal state” when the bonus is won is the “ultra-high accuracy mode”. Can do. As described in step S116-16-4-5 in FIG. 57, when the instruction state flag is “2”, the ART mode of the first “1” set in the ART state is set as the ART mode in the ART initial setting process. Since the “ART mode E” that is most advantageous to the player is set, the episode “5” bonus effect is executed together with the start of the BB, so that the player benefits from the first “1” set in the ART state. You can know that you will be playing.

(Direction decision table)
Next, the effect determination table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The effect determination table is provided in the sub ROM 402 and is provided for determining effects to be performed in each state managed by the main control board 300. Specifically, “production No.” and production contents corresponding to “production No.” are defined. In the effect determination table, conditions for executing effects such as a state managed by the main control board 300 are defined. Here, in the present embodiment, the effect determination table includes the normal state effect determination table (see FIG. 76A) used when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “normal state”, and the main control. When the state managed by the substrate 300 is the “BB state”, the BB state effect determination table (see FIG. 76B) and when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART state” The ART state effect determination table used (see FIG. 76C) and the first state used when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first ART added state” or the “second ART added state”. If the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “infinite ART state”, the second ART added state effect determination table (see FIG. 76D) An infinite ART state effect determination table (see FIG. 76 (E)) used for the above and an ART continuous effect state determination table (FIG. 76) used when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART continuous effect state”. 76 (F)). In addition to this, an effect determination table (not shown) is provided.

(First animation in this embodiment)
Next, based on FIG. 77, the 1st animation in this embodiment is demonstrated. Note that FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining notification when the “push order bell” is won in the ART state.

  First, in FIG. 77 (A), the start lever 10 is operated by the player, and the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are fluctuating. The winning combination determined by operating the start lever 10 is the push order bell “132A”. Therefore, “13” indicating that the left stop button 11 is operated first and the right stop button 13 is operated next is displayed on the payout number display 16, and the left stop button 11 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31. Is displayed first, the right stop button 13 is operated next, and the middle stop button 12 is operated last, “132” is displayed.

  Next, in FIG. 77 (B), the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are stopped by operating according to the operation order notified in FIG. 77 (A). In this case, a combination of symbols “bell” is displayed on the middle line, and is omitted in FIG. 77B, but the stop button that made the third stop is not pressed. After that, “ANY-Bell-ANY” is stopped on the “3” active lines of “middle line”, “upward right line”, and “downward right line” on the payout number display 16. Thus, “9”, which is the number of medals to be awarded, is displayed.

  Next, FIG. 77 (C) shows the start time of the next game of FIG. 77 (A) and FIG. 77 (B). The push order bell “321A” is won and the push order bell “321A” is won. The notification of the operation order corresponding to is shown. As described above, in the ART state, when the “push order bell” or “push order replay” is selected, the operation order using the payout number display 16 and the liquid crystal display device 31 is notified. . FIG. 77 shows an example of a notification mode when the “push order bell” is won in the ART state (instruction game “2”), but it may be a state referring to the instruction search table “2” shown in FIG. For example, regarding “push order bell” and “push order replay”, notification similar to FIG. 77 is performed.

(Second animation in this embodiment)
Next, the second animation in this embodiment will be described based on FIG. FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining a case where “chance replay” is won in the normal state.

  First, in FIG. 78 (A), the start lever 10 is operated by the player, and the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are fluctuating. The winning combination determined by operating the start lever 10 is “chance replay”.

  Next, in FIG. 78B, the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are all operated, and the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are stopped. . In this case, the symbol combination “replay-replay-bell” is displayed on the effective line of the middle stage. Note that the symbol combination “replay-replay-bell” is a symbol combination related to chance replay, as shown in FIG. 6. FIG. 78 (C) shows the start time of the next game in FIGS. 78 (A) and 78 (B).

  Here, in FIG. 78A, the winning combination determined by the player operating the start lever 10 is “chance replay”. Therefore, in the processing of the main CPU 301, step S109- in FIG. As shown in 16-5, step S109-16-6, the number of chance replay ceilings is subtracted. On the other hand, for example, the liquid crystal display device 31 and the speaker 33 are not used to notify that the chance replay ceiling number has been subtracted. Therefore, the player can grasp that the chance replay ceiling count has been subtracted only by displaying the symbol combination “Replay-Replay-Bell” on the active line in the middle line. The combination of symbols displayed on the line can be watched. In addition, since the current value of the chance replay ceiling number cannot be grasped via the liquid crystal display device 31, the LED 32, or the speaker 33, when a symbol combination related to the chance replay is displayed, BB is displayed. The game motivation such as playing a game until winning can be aroused.

  In the present embodiment, the notification that the number of chance replay ceilings has been subtracted is not performed. However, by using the speaker 33 to make a special sound, the number of chance replay ceilings has been subtracted. Notification may be performed. In the present embodiment, the current value of the chance replay ceiling number is configured so that it cannot be grasped via the liquid crystal display device 31, the LED 32, or the speaker 33. It may be suggested to use. As a specific suggestion, in the liquid crystal display device 31, if a suggestion image display area is provided and the suggestion image display area is blue, the remaining number of chance replay ceilings is “5” or more, and the red display If displayed, it can be shown that the remaining number of chance replay ceilings is “3” or less. Thereby, it can be made into the judgment element of whether to continue playing a game.

(Third animation in this embodiment)
Next, based on FIG. 79, the 3rd animation in this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the case where “bonus” is won in the ART state.

  First, FIG. 79A shows a state in which any “push order bell” is won and all reels are stopped. FIG. 79 (B) shows the operation of the start lever 10 in the next game of FIG. 79 (A). Note that the winning combination determined by operating the start lever 10 in FIG. 79B is “BB01 + chance replay”. In the liquid crystal display device 31 of FIG. 79 (B), “!” Indicating that a chance has come is displayed.

  Next, in FIG. 79C, a symbol combination “replay-replay-bell”, which is a symbol combination related to chance replay, is displayed on the middle line. In addition, since the symbol related to “Replay” is higher than the symbol related to “Bonus”, the priority order for drawing the symbol on the active line is “Bonus” and “Chance” as in “BB01 + Chance Replay”. In the winning combination in which “Replay” is won at the same time, the combination of symbols related to “Chance Replay” is preferentially stopped on the active line in the winning game. Here, as shown in FIG. 7, in the third RT gaming state (in general) constituting the ART state, “chance replay” of winning number “02” is not won, and “BB01 +” of winning number “30” is won. “Chance Replay”, “BB02 + Chance Replay” with a winning number “36”, and “BB03 + Chance Replay” with a winning number “42” can be won. On the other hand, in the first RT gaming state (in general) that constitutes the normal state, “chance replay” with the winning number “02”, “BB01 + chance replay” with the winning number “30”, “BB02 + chance” with the winning number “36” Both “Replay” and “BB03 + Chance Replay” with a winning number “42” can be won. That is, in the ART state, when the symbol combination related to “chance replay” is displayed on the active line, it is determined that “bonus” is won at the same time. Therefore, when “chance replay” is displayed in the normal state, the “bonus” is not necessarily fixed, but the value of the number of chance replay ceilings is subtracted. On the other hand, when displayed in the ART state, the “bonus” is always determined, and the normal state and the ART state have different roles. As shown in the sequence data table in FIG. 5, the symbol combination “replay-replay-bell”, which is a symbol combination related to chance replay, can be performed by pressing the left stop button 11 at any symbol position on the left reel 18. Even if it is pressed, the symbol arrangement is such that the “replay” symbol can be displayed on the effective line of the left reel 18. Even if the middle stop button 12 is pressed at any symbol position of the middle reel 19, the middle reel 19 The symbol arrangement is such that the “replay” symbol can be displayed on the active line of the right reel 20, and the “bell” symbol is displayed on the effective line of the right reel 20 even if the right stop button 13 is pressed at any symbol position of the right reel 20. Can be displayed. For example, in FIG. 79B, even if the left stop button 11 is pressed aiming at the “red BAR” symbol at the symbol position “05” of the left reel 18, the “replay” symbol at the symbol position “04” is given priority. Is displayed on the active line, so that the stop mode is as shown in FIG. Note that after the game shown in FIG. 79 (D), it is allowed to display the “red BAR” symbol on the active line in accordance with the winning combination.

  Next, FIG. 79 (D) shows the operation of the start lever 10 of the next game of FIG. 79 (C). Note that, from FIG. 79D, for example, an effect is provided over a plurality of games, and after the plurality of games have elapsed, a continuous effect that notifies whether or not a bonus is won is executed. Note that, as shown in the example of FIG. 79, the continuous effect is executed when a bonus is won, or when “Watermelon” with a winning number “16” or “Cherry” with a winning number “17” is won. Can be done. For example, in FIG. 79D, an image that prompts the operation (continuous operation) of the effect button 21 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31, and an effect of opening the door image is performed. In addition, between FIG. 79C and FIG. 79D, the effect of whether or not to enter the effect shown in FIG. 79D is performed over “1” game or a plurality of games (not shown). )

  Next, FIG. 79 (E) shows a state where all the reels in the game of FIG. 79 (D) are stopped. In FIG. 79E, the door image is shown open in the liquid crystal display device 31, and an image notifying that “bonus” has been established is displayed. In FIG. 79 (E), it is not notified which BB is specifically won out of the bonuses “BB01” to “BB03”.

  In FIG. 79 (F), games after the game “8” from the game in FIG. 79 (B) are shown. In FIG. 79 (F), the winning combination determined by operating the start lever 10 is “off”. That is, as shown in step S109-15-11 in FIG. 40, when the effect state counter is not less than “7” (when it is “8” or more), instruction display data at bonus time is displayed in step S109-15-12. The table is set, and the instruction type corresponding to the winning bonus is determined in step S109-15-13. Therefore, in FIG. 79 (F), an image “Aim for the red BAR!” Corresponding to “BB01” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31, and the instruction content corresponding to “BB01” is displayed on the payout number display 16. “40” is displayed. That is, in the game shown in FIG. 79 (F), assuming that the combination of symbols related to “Red BAR” is displayed on the active line, the game shown in FIG. 79 (B) to the game shown in FIG. 79 (F). This means that it is carried forward that the combination of symbols related to the bonus is displayed on the active line. Note that, at a minimum, if the instruction type corresponding to the bonus won in the liquid crystal display device 31 is notified, the instruction content by the payout number display 16 may not be displayed.

(Fourth animation in this embodiment)
Next, based on FIG. 80, the 4th animation in this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 80 is a diagram illustrating a case where “bonus” is won in the normal state (normally “2”). Note that the winning combination determined by operating the start lever 10 in FIG. 80C is “BB01 + watermelon”.

  First, in FIGS. 80A and 80B, the display image (background image) of “2” is normally displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31. The display image (background image) shown in FIG. 78 is a normal “1” display image (background image) in the normal state, and the normal “1” in FIGS. 2 ”is different from the display image (background image).

  In FIG. 80 (C), the fact that “BB01 + watermelon” has been won is informed that the “special continuous effect” has occurred in the liquid crystal display device 31. That is, as shown in the BB command reception process of FIG. 72, when any of “BB01” to “BB03” is received as the conditional device command when it is normally “2”, step S302 in FIG. In -3-17-5, execution of the special continuous effect is designated. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 80C, a “special continuous effect” occurs. Then, a confrontation effect with an enemy character is executed in FIGS. 80D to 80F, and as a result, in FIG. 80G, it is notified that a bonus has been won. The “special continuous effect” may be executed when the bonus is won in the normal state “1”, or when the bonus is won in the normal state “1”. May be. Alternatively, it may be executed only when a bonus is won in normal “2” in the normal state. In any case, the “special continuous effect” may be executed as an effect when the bonus is won in the normal “2” in the normal state. As a result, normally, in “2”, it is possible to cause the player to play the game while requesting the occurrence of the “special continuous effect”.

(Fifth animation in this embodiment)
Next, based on FIG. 81, the 5th animation in this embodiment is demonstrated. In FIG. 81, when any one of “BB01” to “BB03” is executed, before “RB” of winning number “48” is won, and when “Push Order Bell” is won after “RB” is won. It is a figure which shows the alerting | reporting aspect. More specifically, the result of performing the processing from step S109-15-2 to step S109-15-8 in the instruction game display management processing of FIG. 40 is animated.

  First, “BB01” to “BB03” in the present embodiment are during a general game during a bonus (for example, “second RT gaming state during BB” shown in FIG. 18) and during an RB carryover during a bonus (for example, FIG. 18). And the “RB gaming state during BB” (for example, “RB gaming state during BB” shown in FIG. 18). Furthermore, “BB01” to “BB03” in the present embodiment are related to the “first order bell” during the general game during the bonus (for example, “the second RT gaming state during BB” shown in FIG. 18). In the “stop control”, the RB is carried over, and during the RB carryover during bonus (for example, “the 3rd RT gaming state during BB” shown in FIG. 18), It is configured to stop by “second stop control” which is different from “1 stop control”. That is, it is configured to be able to change from “first stop control” to “second stop control” triggered by “RB carryover”.

  Specifically, the “first stop control” performs control to display a combination of symbols in the operation order indicated by the operation order of the stop button in FIG. For example, if the winning number “20A” is pressed in the push order bell “123A” and the stop button is operated in the order of “Left → Middle → Right”, the “9 bells” (the middle reel 19 When “bell” is stopped in the middle stage and the other stop buttons are operated in the order of operation, “three bells” (for example, “bell” in the upper stage of the middle reel 19) is stopped. On the other hand, the “second stop control” performs a control to display a combination of symbols that is not related to the operation order indicated by the operation order of the stop button in FIG. For example, if the winning number “20A” is pressed in the push order bell “123A” and the stop button is operated in the order of “Left → Middle → Right”, the “9 bells” (the middle reel 19 "9 bells" ("bell" in the middle reel) is also stopped when the other stop buttons are operated in the operating order. That is, during the bonus carry-over RB (for example, “the third RT gaming state during BB” shown in FIG. 18), the operation order of “push order bell” is notified on the payout number display 16 and the liquid crystal display device 31. However, in actuality, regardless of the operation order, the same symbol combinations as those operated in the operation order are displayed, and the same number of medals are paid out as in the operation order. On the other hand, during the general game during the bonus (for example, “the second RT gaming state during BB” shown in FIG. 18), even if the “push order bell” is won, the payout number display 16 and the liquid crystal display device 31 The operation order of “push order bell” is not notified. Because, during the general game during the bonus (for example, “second RT gaming state during BB” shown in FIG. 18), the combination of symbols related to “push order bell” is displayed in the “first stop control” described above. Therefore, if the operation order of “push order bell” is notified on the payout number display 16 or the liquid crystal display device 31, the operation order is intentionally different from the notified operation order. There is a possibility that the number of games until reaching a payout exceeding “53”, which is a bonus ending condition, may be increased. Then, if the number of games until reaching the payout exceeding the bonus end condition “53” is increased, it is possible to receive an additional lottery for the number of sets in the ART state by the increased number of games. . Therefore, in order to prevent such a deliberate act of ending the bonus end condition, during the general game during the bonus (for example, “the second RT gaming state during BB” shown in FIG. 18), The liquid crystal display device 31 is configured not to notify the operation order of “push order bell”.

  Therefore, during the general game in the bonus shown in FIG. 81A, for example, even if the winning number “21A” of the winning number “21” is won, the payout number display 16 and the liquid crystal display device 31 “ The operation order of “push order bell” is not notified. Normally, the player often operates the stop button in the operation order of “left → middle → right” if the operation order is not notified. Thus, when the winning number “21A” is pressed and the winning order bell “132A” is won, “3 bells” is displayed by operating in the order of “left → middle → right”. Thus, by matching by chance, there is no problem that a combination of symbols with a small number of payouts is displayed, but by informing the operation order to the last, by displaying a combination of symbols with a small number of payouts intentionally, The main purpose is to prevent the act of delaying the bonus end condition.

  Also, as another aspect of not informing the operation order of “push order bell” during the general game during the bonus, when the operation order of “push order bell” is also notified during the general game during the bonus, For example, when “RB” and “push order bell” are won and the bonus is terminated without winning other winning roles, it seems that the lottery for acquiring the number of sets in the ART state is not performed. May be given to the player, but in the general game in the bonus, by providing a non-notification period in which the operation order of the “push order bell” is not notified, a winning combination other than the “push order bell” ( (For example, “Watermelon” or “Cherry”) may be included, thereby giving the player the feeling that a lottery to acquire the number of sets in the ART state has not been performed. End up It can be prevented.

  Next, FIG. 81B shows a state where “RB” of the winning number “48” is won by operating the start lever 10, and at this time, the liquid crystal display device 31 displays the liquid crystal. An image suggesting that “RB” has been won is displayed at the edge of the display area of the display device 31, and “70”, which is an instruction content corresponding to “RB”, is displayed on the payout number display 16. ing. 81B, the “tag” symbol of the left reel 18 is stopped on the effective line, the “red BAR” symbol of the middle reel 19 is stopped on the effective line, and the “cherry” symbol of the right reel 20 is stopped. Is stopped on the active line, a combination of symbols related to RB is displayed, and the state shifts to “RB gaming state during BB”. On the other hand, if the combination of symbols related to RB is not displayed, the game proceeds to the RB carryover (“third RT gaming state during BB”) in the bonus shown in FIG. 81 (C).

  In addition, if it is “RB carryover” and the BB is ended without displaying the symbol combination related to the RB, the state shifts from “the third RT gaming state during BB” to the “third RT gaming state” after the end of the BB. It will be. In this embodiment, since the ART state is mainly staying in the “3rd RT gaming state”, when shifting to the ART state after the end of the BB, the ART state is started in the “3rd RT gaming state” as it is. can do. In other words, a gaming machine that stays in a gaming state that is different from the gaming state that stays in the ART state after the end of the BB is elected to the transition role in order to shift from the gaming state after the BB to the gaming state that stays in the ART state. It sometimes took a number of games to play. In this case, the medals earned by BB may be reduced before winning the transitional role, which is a cause of lowering the game entertainment. In this regard, in the present embodiment, it is “RB carryover”, and when the BB is terminated without displaying the symbol combination related to the RB, from the “third RT gaming state during BB”, after the BB is terminated, Since it will shift to the “3rd RT gaming state” and the ART state can be started as it is, it does not require the number of games until the winning combination is won in order to shift to the gaming state where the player stays in the ART state. , It is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interests due to a decrease in the number of medals earned in BB before winning the transitional role.

  Then, after shifting to the RB carryover in the bonus shown in FIG. 81 (C), as shown in FIG. 81 (D), the notification related to “push order bell” is executed. For example, in FIG. 81 (D), when the winning order number “21A” with the winning order number “132A” is won, “13” related to the operating order of the pressing order number “132A” is displayed on the payout number display 16. In the liquid crystal display device 31, “132” related to the operation order of the push order bell “132A” is displayed. Note that, as described above, in FIG. 81D, the combination of symbols related to “push order bell” is stopped in “second stop control”, and therefore “left → right” corresponding to “132”. → "Medium" or other operation sequence, as shown in FIG. 81 (E), "bell" stops at the middle of the middle reel 19, and "9" medals are paid out. Will be done.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 has the ART state (instruction game “2”), the first ART addition state (instruction game “4”), the second ART addition state (instruction game “5”), To control. In the ART state (instructed game “2”), when one of the winning numbers “30” to “47” is won by the internal lottery process, normal during ART based on the bonus type lottery distribution table A special BB state (article operation “3”) during ART which is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal BB state (combination operation “2”) during ART. Decide what to do. In this determination, the normal BB state during the ART (the accessory operation “2”) is easier to determine than the special BB state during the ART (the accessory operation “3”). In addition, the main CPU 301 can select any of the winning numbers “30” to “47” by the internal lottery process in the first ART added state (instructed game “4”) or the second ART added state (instructed game “5”). When the crab is won, it is determined that the special BB state during ART (combination operation “3”) is advantageous to the player compared to the normal BB state during ART (combination operation “2”). In this determination, the normal BB state during ART (servant operation “2”) is not determined, and the special BB state during ART (servant operation “3”) is determined at “100%”. Become. By configuring in this way, in the ART state (instruction game “2”), the first ART addition state (instruction) is indicated by the internal lottery process, rather than winning one of the winning numbers “30” to “47”. It is more advantageous for the player to win one of the winning numbers “30” to “47” through the internal lottery process in the game “4”) or in the second ART addition state (instructed game “5”) Since it will definitely shift to the special BB state during the ART (the accessory operation “3”), in the special game state, it is determined to shift to the advantageous game state, and in the specific state, the advantageous game state A difference can be given as a privilege given to the player when it is decided to shift to the above. Therefore, in the specific state, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous game state, it is possible to give a sense of achievement to the player and to further improve the game entertainment.

  In the present embodiment, symbols arranged on each reel (designs arranged on symbol positions “00” to “20” of each reel) constitute a plurality of symbols of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 constitute a plurality of reels according to the present invention in which a plurality of symbols are arranged on the peripheral surface.

  In this embodiment, the start switch 10sw constitutes a start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by the player of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 constitutes a winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination based on the start operation detected by the starting operation detecting means of the present invention.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 and the reel control board 150 perform reel rotation control for performing control to rotate a plurality of reels based on the start operation detected by the start operation detecting means of the present invention. Configure the means.

  In the present embodiment, the left stop switch 11sw, the middle stop switch 12sw, and the right stop switch 13sw are provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels of the present invention, and stop operation detecting means for detecting a stop operation by the player. Configure.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 and the reel control board 150 are based on the fact that the stop operation has been detected by the stop operation detecting means of the present invention and the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means. Stop control means for stopping the reel being rotated by the reel rotation control means is configured.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 constitutes special game state control means for controlling a special game state that is advantageous to the player over the predetermined game period of the present invention.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 constitutes a first specific state control means for controlling a first specific state in which a lottery related to the extension of the game period in the special game state of the present invention is performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 is a state different from the first specific state of the present invention, and controls the second specific state for performing the lottery related to the extension of the game period in the special game state. A state control means is comprised.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 is a gaming state different from the special gaming state when the specific winning combination is determined by the winning combination determining means of the present invention, and is a player compared to the normal gaming state. The first advantageous gaming state control means for controlling the first advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is configured.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 controls the second advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player compared to the first advantageous gaming state when the specific winning combination is determined by the winning combination determining means of the present invention. The second advantageous gaming state control means is configured.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 is higher than the second advantageous gaming state when the special winning combination is determined by the winning combination determining means when the special gaming state of the present invention is controlled. First transition control means for transitioning to the first advantageous gaming state with probability is configured.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 determines that the second winning combination is determined by the winning combination determining means when the first specific state or the second specific state of the present invention is controlled. A second transition control means for shifting to the advantageous gaming state is configured.

  In the present embodiment, the first ART added state (instructed game “4”) managed by the main control board 300 constitutes the first specific state of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the second ART added state (instruction game “5”) managed by the main control board 300 constitutes the second specific state of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the winning numbers “30” to “47” determined in the internal lottery process in the main CPU 301 constitute the specific winning combination of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the normal BB state during ART (the accessory operation “2”) managed by the main control board 300 constitutes the first advantageous gaming state of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the special BB state during ART (the accessory operation “3”) managed by the main control board 300 constitutes the second advantageous gaming state of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, a gaming machine used for a swivel type gaming machine (slot machine) equipped with an ART has been described, but it may be applied to a gaming machine equipped with an AT or RT.

  In this embodiment, the ART is managed on the main control board 300, but the ART may be managed on the sub-control board 400.

  In the present embodiment, a gaming machine having an ART managed by the number of games has been described. However, the difference number of medals (the difference between the number of medals paid out and the number of medals inserted is predetermined). It may be applied to a gaming machine having an ART managed by having reached the number of

  In the present embodiment, a gaming machine used for a spinning machine (slot machine) has been described. However, the gaming machine may be used for a pachinko gaming machine, a sparrow ball gaming machine, or an arrangement ball gaming machine.

1 gaming machine 2 cabinet 3 front door 4 hinge mechanism 5 keyhole 6 medal slot 7 BET lever 7 sw lever switch 8 MAXBET button 8 sw MAXBET switch 9 settlement button 9 sw settlement switch 10 start lever 10 sw start switch 11 left stop button 11 sw left stop switch 12 Intermediate stop button 12sw Intermediate stop switch 13 Right stop button 13sw Right stop switch 14 Selector 14s Selector sensor 15 Stored number display 16 Discharged number display 16a 1st segment 16b 2nd segment 16c 3rd segment 16d 4th segment 16e 5th segment 16f 6th segment 16g 7th segment 16h 8th segment 16i 9th segment 16j 10th segment 16k 11th segment 16l 12th segment 16m 13th segment 16n 14th segment 16o 15th segment 16p 16th segment 17 s Door open / close sensor 18 Left reel 19 Middle reel 20 Right reel 21 Production button 21 s Production button sensor 22 Cross key 22 s Cross key sensor 23 Display window 24 Receptacle unit 25 Medal payout port 30 External concentration terminal board 31 Liquid crystal display device 32 LED
33 Speaker 100 Status board 150 Reel control board 151 Left stepping motor 152 Middle stepping motor 153 Right stepping motor 154s Left reel sensor 155s Middle reel sensor 156s Right reel sensor 200 Power board 201 Power button 201sw Power switch 202 Hopper 202s Hopper sensor 300 Main control Board 301 Main CPU
302 Main ROM
303 Main RAM
304 Main random number generator 400 Sub control board 401 Sub CPU
402 Sub ROM
403 Sub RAM
404 Sub-random number generator 500 Production control board 501 Production control CPU
502 Production control ROM
503 Production control RAM
504 CGROM
505 Sound source IC
506 Sound source ROM
507 VDP

In order to solve such a problem, a gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols arranged on a peripheral surface, a start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player, and the start operation. A winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination based on the detection of the start operation by the detecting means, and rotating the plurality of reels based on the detection of the starting operation by the start operation detecting means. A reel rotation control means for performing control, a stop operation detection means provided for each of the plurality of reels for detecting a stop operation by a player, and the stop operation detected by the stop operation detection means. And a stop control means for stopping the reels rotated by the reel rotation control means based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means, and a normal game Special gaming state control means for controlling a special gaming state advantageous to the player over a predetermined gaming period, and a first specific state for controlling a first specific state in which a lottery is performed for extending the gaming period in the special gaming state. Specific state control means, a second specific state control means for controlling a second specific state in which a lottery relating to an extension of a game period in the special gaming state is performed, wherein the winning state is a transition from the first specific state; A first advantage for controlling a first advantageous game state that is different from the special game state and that is advantageous to the player as compared to the normal game state when the specific winning combination is determined by the combination determining means. When the specific winning combination is determined by the gaming state control means and the winning combination determination means, the second advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player as compared with the first advantageous gaming state is controlled. A second advantageous gaming state control means that, when the special game state is controlled, when the specific winning combination is determined by the winning combination determination means, the first advantageous game state, the second A first transition control means capable of transitioning to any one of the advantageous gaming states and transitioning to the first advantageous gaming state with a higher probability than the second advantageous gaming state; when the state or the second specific state is controlled, when the specific winning combination is determined by the winning combination determination means, and a second transition control means for shifting to the second advantageous gaming state The first transition control means shifts to the special gaming state after the end of the first advantageous gaming state, and shifts to the first specific state after the second advantageous gaming state ends. 2 Transition control When the means is shifted to the second advantageous gaming state in the first specific state, the means is shifted to the first specific state after the end of the second advantageous gaming state, and the second specific gaming state is the first specific state. When the state is shifted to the second advantageous gaming state, the state is shifted to the first specific state after the end of the second advantageous gaming state .

Claims (1)

A plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols arranged on the circumferential surface;
Start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by the player;
A winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means;
Reel rotation control means for controlling the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means;
Stop operation detecting means provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and detecting a stop operation by a player;
Stop control means for stopping the reel being rotated by the reel rotation control means based on the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detecting means and the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means. When,
Special gaming state control means for controlling a special gaming state advantageous to the player compared to the normal gaming state over a predetermined gaming period;
First specific state control means for controlling a first specific state for performing a lottery related to an extension of a game period in the special gaming state;
A second specific state control means for controlling a second specific state that is different from the first specific state and performs a lottery related to an extension of the game period in the special gaming state;
When a specific winning combination is determined by the winning combination determining means, a first advantageous gaming state that is different from the special gaming state and that is advantageous to the player as compared to the normal gaming state is controlled. 1 advantageous gaming state control means;
Second advantageous gaming state control means for controlling a second advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player as compared to the first advantageous gaming state when the specific winning combination is determined by the winning combination determining means;
If the specific winning combination is determined by the winning combination determining means while the special gaming state is being controlled, a transition to the first advantageous gaming state is made with a higher probability than the second advantageous gaming state. First transition control means;
When the first specified state or the second specified state is controlled, if the specified winning combination is determined by the winning combination determining means, a second transition control for shifting to the second advantageous gaming state Means,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: